{
"articles": [
{
"id": "155000000079",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000079-best-practices-for-sms-deliverability-and-avoiding-sms-restrictions",
"title": "Best Practices for SMS deliverability and Avoiding SMS Restrictions",
"originalTitle": "Best Practices for SMS deliverability and Avoiding SMS Restrictions",
"slug": "best-practices-for-sms-deliverability-and-avoiding-sms-restrictions",
"html": "\n \n \n \n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Overview
This article outlines essential best practices to help you improve SMS deliverability and avoid carrier restrictions. By following these guidelines, you can ensure your messages reach your audience reliably and stay compliant with carrier policies.
We are focused on helping our customers deliver trusted communications. To make sure that the carrier does not block or suspend the account permanently based on bad usage.
We will be monitoring the delivery rate of the overall account and be taking proactive measures(as mentioned below) to keep the delivery rate in check:
Violation Email -We will send out an email notification as soon as the subaccount hits the error rate of 6% and opt-out rate of 2%.
Temporary Account Restriction - We will send out a suspension email as the subaccount hits the error rate of 10% and opt-out rate of 3%.
Please Note: As soon as the account hits the temporary suspension, all upcoming outbound SMS will fail till 00:00 AM UTC.
What should we do when we get a violation email?
Stop all your workflows, campaigns, triggers, and/or bulk actions to contacts who have not explicitly opted in to receive messages from the sub-account.
Enable and customise the Opt Out language and SenderID message as per your use case so that all the upcoming messages are not flagged.
Please discuss this with your client to ensure that no bulk communication or message blasts or cold prospecting message campaigns are sent in the near future before we receive your reply to this ticket.
What are error and opt-out rates and good to have a threshold?
A High Opt-Out Rate indicates that contacts receiving your messages have objected, generated complaints, or marked your SMS as spam. A good opt-out rate is typically in the range of 0—1%. Once the opt-out rate hits 2%, the sub-account will be locked for sending text messages for 24 hours.
A High Delivery Error Rate indicates that you are sending SMS to contacts that are no longer in service, are unreachable, or use a non-SMS-capable device such as a landline. This may also mean that external carrier filters are refusing to deliver your SMS due to bad sending behavior in the past. A good error rate is typically in the range of 0—6%. Once the error rate hits 10%, the sub-account will be locked for sending text messages for 24 hours.
What do I do to get the sub-account suspension removed early?
The sub-account suspension will be lifted in 24 hours. However, If the sub-account is permanently suspended. Please refer to the article Why is your account suspended to unsuspend the sub-account.
How to prevent future SMS suspension
The sub-account should be able to send SMS after 00:01 AM UTC the next day after you received the non-compliant email. You can check the best practices below on how to reduce the error rate:
1. Add Opt Out language (reply STOP/ Cancel to unsubscribe) in all the first SMS sent to a new contact -
2. Add Sender information (Introduction of yourself/company) in all the first SMS sent to a new contact-
3. Do not send messages to SMS-incapable devices like landlines, Enable the Number intelligence for this. This feature will look up the number before sending out the message and enable and temporary DND on the contact.
4. Avoid sending URLs shortened using a public URL shortener
Using public URL shorteners like bit.ly or tinyurl.com can harm SMS deliverability. Carriers—especially T-Mobile and AT&T—flag these as high risk due to their association with spam and phishing.
T-Mobile prohibits URL cycling and multiple redirects. Messages using such tactics may be blocked.
AT&T outright blocks public shorteners.
Best Practices:
Use custom or branded short URLs linked to your business domain.
Limit redirects to no more than one, and avoid cloaking link destinations.
When possible, include the full URL to boost transparency (even if it takes extra characters).
Improving your URL practices can prevent filtering and ensure your messages reach their audience.
5. Make sure the Business Profile, A2P Brand and campaign are registered: As the messaging world is moving towards the direction where without these registrations no messages will be delivered. You can view the trust centre tab once the sub-account country is set to US:
If the country is not set to US, you can still use the system following the best practices so that the delivery rate is high and the SMS is not flagged. A2P campaign is just a more enhanced safety net for delivery but that doesn't mean you cannot use the system without it.
Note - Campaign Verification can take up to 1 week if it is not approved after a week, please raise a support ticket with us to escalate the request to TCR.
6.For future website form opt-in setup, please include a checkbox to ensure the lead gives consent when filling out the form if that's where the leads opt-in.
Below are examples of Web form Opt-In flow.
When Phone Number field is Mandatory in Web form OPT-IN.
Consent checkboxes should be separated for both Marketing and Non-Marketing Messages.
Consent checkboxes cannot be pre-selected and should be optional at all times
Privacy Policy and TnC at footer.
When Phone Number field not Mandatory in Web form OPT-IN.
Consent checkbox not required when Phone Number field is not mandatory.
Privacy Policy and TnC at footer.
7. Good to Have: The first message should have the source of how your leads opt in.
8. Good to Have: Add Opt-in language so contacts are actively double opt-in via sms and web form checkbox (reply 1 to subscribe)
Also, sharing a Messaging Policy which will help you further on this.
",
"media": {
"images": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155053555932/original/omypVzpD4ZIFIAoXgerZHkjna_VbAoHDZQ.png?1757587829",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155053555971/original/BzX61Sff9VPH5IMu3UyqRuZVxlLfb7ASwQ.png?1757587862",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062250747/original/pVWeK4yDfAHpD4YrPxpNU_mtq4uCO-_baw.jpeg?1767888777",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155053553965/original/1jHn9-YOPznYisf4_S9772eWc4kkWtdzgw.png?1757586746",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000318313/original/CdbUV4IqS1HJ_BfgCsqAOrDLVhYquft4Yw.png?1685694447"
],
"gifs": [],
"videos": []
},
"internalLinks": [
"48001207676",
"48001225526",
"48001229784",
"48001213941",
"48001240115"
],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": false,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": true
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:21:01.969Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000000087",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000087-how-to-use-the-email-builder-and-its-in-line-editor",
"title": "How to use the Email Builder and its In-line Editor",
"originalTitle": "How to use the Email Builder and its In-line Editor",
"slug": "how-to-use-the-email-builder-and-its-in-line-editor",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Streamline your email creation process with our efficient inline editor in Email Builder for Templates and Campaigns. This tool offers a dynamic and user-friendly experience, ensuring quality output with increased speed and convenience.
The Email Builder Inline Editor is a powerful tool embedded within our Templates and Campaigns platform that allows you to create and customize emails with unprecedented efficiency and ease. It presents a user-friendly interface that eliminates the complexity of email design and formatting.
The Email Builder Inline Editor leverages the \"What You See Is What You Get\" (WYSIWYG) editing principle. Imagine you're drafting an email, and you decide to bold a sentence, insert an image after a paragraph, or change the color of a heading. As you make these changes in the editor, they are immediately reflected, just as they appear in the final email. This gives you a real-time preview and a straightforward editing experience, helping you to create better emails more efficiently.
This robust tool supports various customization features, allowing you to style your email content using multiple headings and paragraph formats. You can choose from a selection of supported fonts, apply different text sizes ranging from 8px to 96px, and color your text using hex code for precise color selection. You can also apply text formatting such as bold, italic, underline, and strikethrough, or add hyperlinks for redirection.
Moreover, the inline editor allows for custom values, giving you better control over your content. The tool also supports AI-assisted content generation, which can help you create engaging email content faster.
Please Note: For the purpose of maintaining uniformity in the structure of your emails, we have implemented a default padding update. You now have the ability to manage the spacing around your content. Please be aware that the default settings for padding are as follows:\n Top Padding: 12 Bottom Padding: 12 Left Padding: 24 Right Padding: 24
This feature gives you better control over your email's layout and appearance.
What are Some Practical Use Cases for this Feature?
Promotional Email Campaign: Given that this is a promotional email, it's crucial to grab the recipient's attention. You should use vivid colors that align with your brand, catchy fonts, and high-quality images. In the layout settings, consider a single-column structure for easy mobile readability. Place your CTA button in a prominent location and use the button settings to make it stand out with bold colors.
Seasonal Newsletter: For a newsletter, information architecture is critical. The multi-section layout would be a perfect fit for this. Each section can contain a different product category with optimized images and brief descriptions. Also, it's best to choose a background color that complements the images and a font that's easy to read.
Re-engagement Campaign: In this case, personalization features should be maximized. Use a single-column layout for a more personal letter-like format. Choose warm, inviting colors and fonts. Use dynamic content settings to insert the recipient's name and to tailor the message based on their previous interactions.
Abandoned Cart Email: A two-column layout could work here, with one side featuring the product(s) left in the cart and the other providing a reminder and a special offer. For a more personalized touch, use dynamic content settings to insert images and details of the abandoned items automatically.
Event Invitation: The email should be clean and straightforward. Use a single-column layout and a minimalist design with a clear CTA. Consider using a countdown timer component (using custom code) to create a sense of urgency.
Educational Email Series: Depending on the complexity of the topic, a single or multi-section layout can be used. A mix of text, images, and video (if supported) can help explain the issue better. Utilize the settings to make links prominent and provide a list or bullet point styling for key takeaways.
Customer Appreciation Email: This type of email should be very personalized. Utilize dynamic content settings to include the customer's name and specific details about their interaction with your business (e.g., length of time as a customer, products purchased). Use a single-column layout and soothing colors to create a warm and appreciative tone.
Post-Purchase Follow-Up Email: Use a simple, single-column layout. The email's color scheme should match your brand, and the message should be clear and concise. Dynamic content settings can provide specific details about the customer's order and suggest other relevant products.
Onboarding Sequence: Use the email builder to create a series of emails that guide a new user or customer through your product or service. You can utilize a single-column layout, clear and concise text, images, and even video (if your builder supports it) to provide step-by-step instructions. Use dynamic content settings to personalize the email with the user's name.
Product Launch: An exciting product launch email can make a significant impact. Consider using a single-column layout with vibrant colors, large font sizes for essential details, and high-quality product images. If your email builder has this feature, create a sense of urgency with a countdown timer component.
Webinar Announcement: A clean, straightforward design is needed for such announcements. A single-column layout with a prominent headline, CTA button, and dynamic content to tailor the email based on the recipient's interests would work well here.
Weekly Digest: A multi-section layout would be most helpful for this purpose, with each section containing a summary of different content (articles, videos, products) and a CTA to \"Read More\" or \"Watch Now.\"
Survey Invitation: A single-column layout with a clear explanation of the survey's purpose and a prominent CTA button to start the study would be ideal. Keep the design simple and the text concise.
Donation Request: For a donation request, a single-column layout with heartfelt content, images illustrating the cause, and a bold CTA to donate would work best. Use dynamic content to personalize the message.
Testimonial Request: After a customer has been with you for a period, you may want to request a testimonial. A simple, personal, single-column email with a direct CTA can encourage a positive response.
Membership Renewal Reminder: This could involve a multi-section layout, with one part gently reminding the recipient of the upcoming renewal and the other highlighting the benefits they've enjoyed and what they stand to gain.
Beta Tester Invitation: A single-column layout with a compelling headline, a brief description of what's expected of beta testers, and a clear CTA to join would work well.
Year-End Review: This could have a multi-section layout, with each part summarizing a month or quarter of the year. Use lots of visuals (charts, graphs, images) and keep the text concise.
Employee Communication: If you're using an email builder for internal communication, a single-column layout with a clear structure (e.g., announcements, updates, reminders) can keep employees informed and engaged.
Cross-Sell/Upsell Email: An email suggesting related or premium products can boost sales after a customer purchases. Use a single or multi-section layout with product images, brief descriptions, and CTAs to view or buy the product.
Key Benefits of the Email Builder Inline Editor
Visual Consistency: The inline editor allows you to ensure visual consistency in your emails. For example, you can maintain a uniform look and feel by setting default padding to Top 12, Bottom 12, Left 24, and Right 24 across all emails.
Custom Font Support: With support for various fonts such as Arial, Georgia, Verdana, and more, you can align your email style with your brand aesthetics. For example, if your brand uses Helvetica in its communication, you can use it in your emails for consistency.
Precise Text Styling: The inline editor lets you fine-tune your text's appearance with options like bold, italic, underline, and strikethrough. You could highlight critical points in your emails by making them bold or italics to draw attention.
Flexible Color Options: Adding color through hex codes provides precise control over text and highlight colors. For instance, if your brand color is #AFAFAF, you can ensure this exact color is used in your email text or highlights.
Hyperlink Addition: The tool allows you to add hyperlinks to words or phrases, enabling readers to access related content directly. For example, you could link a product name to its page on your website, providing a seamless journey for the reader.
AI-Assisted Content Creation: The feature of Content AI to generate content faster can significantly reduce the time you spend writing and editing emails. For instance, it could auto-suggest text based on your initial inputs, making email creation more efficient.
Text Formatting: The editor supports copy-pasting from other sources and removes the styling when you click on text formatting. This can be handy when you import text from a document but want to apply your email's styling.
How to Use the Email Builder and its Inline Editor
Go to \"Marketing\" > \"Emails\" > \"Templates\"
Here, you can create a newtemplate or edit an existing one.
Navigating the New User Interface
Upon accessing the Email Builder, you will be greeted by a sleek, intuitive user interface. On the top, you will find a toolbar with different functionalities:
The 'Add Elements' button lets you introduce new content into your email, from text and images to more complex structures.
The 'Manage Elements' option gives an overview of all elements in your email, allowing you to select and adjust them easily.
Lastly, the 'Appearance' setting lets you control the global style of your email, including things like background color, Divider, Custom CSS styling, and Mobile Formatting.
These functionalities are designed to give you complete control over your email's design, from the individual components to the overall look and feel.
Adding Elements
Clicking on the 'Add Elements' button creates a comprehensive list of content types you can add to your email. Here's a brief description of each:
Text:
This versatile element can be used for headings, paragraphs, captions, and more. With the inline editor, you can fine-tune every text aspect, from font style and color to alignment. For heading text (H1–H4), select the heading and use the Bold (B) button in the toolbar to turn bold formatting on or off while keeping the same heading level.
Image:
If you want to include photos, graphics, or any other visual content, the Image element is the tool you need. You can upload images directly from your computer or link them from an external source.
Image Upload: Use the upload feature to add an image directly from your device. The maximum upload size is 10MB, ensuring you have enough capacity for high-resolution photos.
Image URL: Alternatively, you can link an image from an external source or your CRM's Media Library. Paste the image URL into the provided field.
Alt Text: Alt text helps improve email accessibility for recipients who use screen readers or when the image fails to load. Describe the image briefly and clearly in this field.
Link (optional): If you want your image to redirect to a specific URL when clicked, you can input the desired link in the Link field.
Width and Height: Adjust the size of your image using these fields. You can set specific pixel values or tick the box for 'Set height and width to auto' for automatic sizing based on the image's original proportions.
Padding: Control the space around your image by adjusting the padding. Set the padding for the top, bottom, left, and right sides according to your design preferences.
Alignment: Set the alignment of your image. For instance, select 'Center' to center your image in its respective container. Other options include 'Left' and 'Right' alignment.
Flexible Editing Layout (Left/Right Panel)
Dock the edit panel on the right (or switch back to left) to work more efficiently—especially when using Email AI side by side with manual edits.
What it does (why it matters)
Positioning the panel on the right creates a natural split workspace that speeds iteration and keeps focus on outcomes, not tooling.
Prerequisite
To see Email AI and the panel switch in the editor, enable Email AI in Agency Labs Settings → sub-account feature.
How to switch panel position
1) Open Marketing → Emails, then open a Campaign or Template in edit mode.
2) Turn on Email AI (if you plan to use AI side by side).
3) Click the panel switch control in the editor to dock the panel Right or move it Left.
4) Continue editing with Email AI and the canvas visible together.
Tip: Use right-docked panel when you expect many AI suggestions; switch to left for parity with other tools if preferred.
Enhance user interaction with the Button element. You can link to a webpage, start a download, or trigger any other click-based action.
Button Text: Enter the text you want to display on your button. For instance, you might use 'Follow Me' to invite readers to follow a link to your social media page.
Font and Size: Choose the font and size that best fits your email's aesthetic. For example, you could use 'Arial' at a size of '14' for a classic, readable appearance.
Font Color: Select the color of your button text. Colors are specified using hexadecimal codes, e.g., '#ffffff' for white.
Actions:
URL: This is the most common button action. You can direct the recipient to a specific webpage. Enter the URL of the page you want the button to link to.
Mail: This action will open the recipient's default email client to compose a new email. You can set a predetermined recipient email address.
File Download: If you want the button to trigger a file download, choose this action. You'll need to provide the direct download URL of the file.
Telephone: This action is great for mobile users. When the recipient clicks the button, their device will initiate a phone call to the number you've entered.
Other: If you have a unique action in mind not covered by the above categories, choose this option.
Alignment: Choose the alignment for your button. Options include 'Left,' 'Center,' or 'Right.''
Total Width: If you want your button to span its entire container width, enable this option.
Background Color: Choose the color for your button's background. Like font color, this is specified using a hexadecimal code. For instance, '#000000' will make the button's background black.
Custom values in color fields (real-time rendering)
You can use Custom Values in color inputs (for example, Background Color, Body Color, or Button Color).
When you enter a Custom Value token, the builder applies the color instantly on the canvas. You do not need to switch to Preview mode to confirm color changes.
Border Radius: Customize the roundness of your button's corners by adjusting the border-radius. A higher number will result in more rounded corners. For example, setting the radius to '75' will give your button a pill-like shape.
Padding: Set the space between your button text and the button's border by adjusting the padding values for the top, bottom, left, and right sides.
Using these settings, you can design buttons that match your email's overall look and feel and encourage your recipients to take action.
Divider:
The Divider element allows you to introduce clear separations between different sections of your email. Customize the color, width, and style to fit your design.
Height: Set the thickness of your divider line. A more significant number will result in a thicker line. For example, setting the height to '2' creates a moderately thick line.
Width (%): Determine the horizontal span of your divider within its container. This is expressed as a percentage of the container width. For instance, a width of '100' means the divider will span its entire container width.
Line Type: Choose the style of your divider line. Options typically include 'Solid,' 'Dashed', or 'Dotted.','
Alignment: Choose the alignment for your divider. Options include 'Left', 'Center', or 'Right'.
Color: Specify the color of your divider using a hexadecimal code. For instance, '# FED7E2' might be used for a soft pink divider.
Padding: This adjusts the space between your divider and other elements. You can set different padding values for the divider's top, bottom, left, and right sides.
Social:
Want your recipients to visit your social media profiles? The Social element lets you easily include icons linked to various social media platforms.
Social Items: Add your social media platforms. You can typically add icons for Facebook, Instagram, and Twitter. Just click on the platform and enter your handle or profile URL.
Icon Styles: Determine the look of your social media icons. You can choose between styles, shapes, and designs to best fit your email's aesthetic.
Display: Choose the display mode for your icons - it can be 'Icon', 'Text ', or 'Icon and .'
Align: Adjust the alignment of your icons within the email. You can align them to the 'Left,' 'Center,' or 'Right.'
Font: Set the font for the platform's name that appears with the icon. If you're using the 'Icon and Text' display, this will be the font of the text.
Font Color: Specify the color of your social icons using a hexadecimal code. For instance, '#00a4bd' might be used for a teal color.
Size: Adjust the size of your icons to ensure they're easily visible but not overwhelming.
Space: This sets the amount of space between each social media icon.
Padding: Adjust the space between your social media icons and other elements. You can set different padding values for the social media icon section's top, bottom, left, and right sides.
By properly setting these values, you can seamlessly integrate your social media presence into your emails, providing recipients with an easy way to connect with you on these platforms.
Footer:
Use the Footer element to include essential information like contact details, company address, or unsubscribe links.
Text Editing: Click on the footer text to activate the inline editor. You can then alter the text to meet your requirements. You can type directly into the footer whether you want to add your company's address, privacy policy links, or an unsubscribe link.
Font and Style: The inline editor lets you alter your footer text's font, size, and color. Highlight the text you want to change and choose from the options in the editing toolbar. You can make the text bold, italic, underline it, or add a strikethrough.
Links: Using the inline editor, you can easily add hyperlinks in your footer. Highlight the text you want to turn into a link, click the 'link' icon in the toolbar, and enter your desired URL. This is handy for linking to your company's website or directing to a specific page like your terms of service or privacy policy.
Alignment and Spacing: Align your text to the left, right, or center, as per your design needs. Also, control the line spacing to ensure your footer text is readable and neatly presented.
Code:
Need more advanced features? The Code element allows you to insert custom HTML code directly into your email. This is where you input your custom code. This allows you to create more advanced layouts and components within your email.
Please note: The Code block is intended for users who are proficient in HTML. As a precaution, we recommend familiarizing yourself with the essentials of HTML before using this feature. For guidance, you might find these resources helpful: HTML Email Basics Using Code Blocks
By integrating custom HTML, you can create highly personalized email experiences, allowing you to go beyond the standard design capabilities of email templates. Be aware, however, that email clients can have different levels of support for HTML and CSS, so always test your emails before sending them out.
Video:
Engage your recipients with multimedia content. Insert a Video element and link it to your hosted video content.
Video Type: Select the platform where your video is hosted. This could be YouTube, Vimeo, Wistia, or HTML 5 video.
Video URL: Paste the URL of the video you wish to embed. This should be the direct link to the video on your selected platform.
Video Thumbnail: This is the image that users will see before they play the video. You can upload a custom thumbnail (maximum size: 10MB) or use an image URL. For instance, a placeholder image from your Media Library could be used.
Width and Height: Set the dimensions of the video player within your email. You also have the option to set the height and width to 'auto', which adjusts the size based on the video's aspect ratio and the space available in the email.
Play Button Size: Choose the size of the play button that appears on your video thumbnail. Options typically include Small, Medium, or Large.
Play Button Opacity: Adjust the visibility of the play button. You can make it more or less opaque depending on your design needs.
Padding: This is the space around your video player. You can adjust the top, bottom, left, and right padding to fit the video perfectly within your email layout.
Shopping Cart:
If you're in the e-commerce industry, the Shopping Cart element is a handy tool for including product details, pricing, and direct links to your online store. It's a way to remind them of the products they're interested in and encourage them to finalize their purchases.
Here's how to customize this section:
Padding: Adjust the space around your shopping cart content to separate it from other sections in the email visually. Padding can be adjusted at the cart section's top, bottom, left, and right.
Font: Choose the font for the text in your shopping cart. It could be the system default or another style consistent with your email design.
Text Color: Customize the color of the text in your shopping cart. It could be black (#000), or any other color that matches your email design.
Background Color: Select the color of the shopping cart's background. This could be white (#ffffff) or any other color that makes the text easy to read.
Within the Shopping Cart element, you typically display the following for each product:
Product Name: The name of the product as it appears on your website or online store.
Price: The individual price of the product.
Quantity: The number of that particular product the customer has chosen.
Line Price: The total price for that line item (Price x Quantity).
Repeat these steps for each product in the shopping cart. Displaying this detailed information provides transparency and helps customers review their orders, making them more likely to proceed to checkout.
Customizing your Shopping Cart section in this way ensures a better user experience, aligns with your overall email design, and ultimately drives conversions.
RSS Header:
The RSS Header block in the email builder is a powerful tool that allows you to dynamically populate the <channel> tags from your RSS Feed in your email campaign.
Here are the tags and their corresponding custom values you can use:
<title> corresponds to {{rss_feed.title}}
<description> corresponds to {{rss_feed.description}}
<link> corresponds to {{rss_feed.url}}
<lastBuildDate> corresponds to {{rss_feed.date}}
You can choose between 'Basic' and 'Custom' when using the RSS Header block.
'Basic' will add non-editable text in the Text Editor like this:
'Custom' will add editable text in the Text Editor like this:
Updates from {{rss_feed.url}} <h1>{{rss_feed.title}}</h1> <strong>{{rss_feed.description}}</strong><br /> <br /> <strong>In the {{rss_feed.date}} edition:</strong><br />
These RSS <channel> variables can also be utilized in the subject field of your email campaign.
RSS Items:
When dealing with RSS feeds, the \"RSS Items\" element is a crucial part of an email builder in email marketing platforms. It essentially works as a dynamic content placeholder that populates content from the RSS feed into your email campaign. The RSS items can range from blog posts, news updates, articles, or any published content accessible through an RSS feed. You have the following RSS Editing Options:Excerpts: This option will only display a summary or snippet from the original content of each RSS feed item. This option is useful when you want to give your subscribers a preview of the content, prompting them to click through to read the full item on your website.
Excerpts with Image: Much like the Excerpts option, this also displays a summary or snippet from the original content. However, it also includes an image associated with the RSS feed item. This is particularly beneficial for visual impact and can significantly improve engagement rates.
Title: If you select this option, only the title of each RSS feed item will be displayed. This is a minimalistic approach and can be effective when the titles themselves are descriptive or intriguing enough to motivate the reader to click and read more.
Full Content: Choosing this option will import the entire content of each RSS feed item into your email. This can be useful if your RSS feed items are short or you want to provide complete information within the email. However, this may also lead to long emails if the feed items are lengthy.
Custom: The Custom option allows you to choose what information from the RSS feed is included in the email and how it is displayed. For instance, you may include the title, a short excerpt, the author's name, and a link to the full item. This option requires more setup but offers the most flexibility in tailoring the presentation of the feed items in your email.
This element can dynamically import different attributes related to each RSS item. These attributes could be:
Title of the post/item ({{rss_item.title}})
Summary or description of the post/item ({{rss_item.content}})
Direct URL link to the original post/item ({{rss_item.url}})
The publication date of the post/item ({{rss_item.date}})
The author of the post/item ({{rss_item.author}})
When you incorporate the \"RSS Items\" element into your email, you can decide what information to display and how it should be presented. You can display just the title or the title along with a summary or even a hyperlink to the full post.
The customization options also extend to the design aspects. For instance, you can adjust the padding (top, bottom, left, right) around the element to fit your email's aesthetic. Plus, you can choose whether or not to include an image from each post in the email.
Layouts:
Layouts determine the structure of your email content. You have various options, from simple single-column layouts to more complex structures.
Here's a detailed explanation of each layout:
1: This layout represents a single-column structure. All content is placed in one straight vertical line. This is the most basic and one of the most common layouts used in emails. It's great for readability, especially on smaller screens such as mobile devices.
2: This layout corresponds to a two-column structure. Your email content is divided into two vertical columns. This layout is ideal for displaying two groups of content side by side, like an image and a text block or two articles from an RSS feed.
1/3: 2/3 and 2/3 : 1/3: These layouts represent a structure where the content is divided into two unequal columns. In 1/3: 2/3, one column takes up 1/3 of the width, and the other takes up 2/3. It's reversed in the 2/3: 1/3 layout. These are great for highlighting one piece of content more than the other, like an image and an accompanying description where the image is the main focus.
1/4: 3/4 and 3/4 : 1/4: Similar to the above, but here one column takes up 1/4 of the space, and the other takes up 3/4, and vice versa. This layout is useful when one piece of content is significantly more important than the other, such as a small navigation menu alongside a large content area.
4: This layout refers to a four-column structure. Your email content is split across four equal vertical columns. This is useful for presenting multiple pieces of content of equal importance side by side, like a grid of images or multiple articles from an RSS feed.
These layouts offer various ways to structure and present your content, depending on your specific needs and the type of email you're sending. By understanding the different options, you can choose the most effective layout for your email.
To add any of these elements to your email, drag and drop them onto your canvas. When you select an element for editing, the Inline Editor will pop up, providing numerous options to modify your chosen element to fit your requirements.
Managing Text and Formatting
An inline editor is a powerful tool that lets you easily manage text and its formatting. When you highlight any portion of text, a range of options becomes available in the editor.
You can change the heading type.
Select a different font, adjust font size, and modify the text color.
It doesn't end there - options for bold, italic, underline, and strikethrough are also available.
If you wish to add a hyperlink to your text, the inline editor allows you to do so, giving you control over its display text and target URL.
Add/Edit Link: This option allows you to add a new hyperlink to your email or modify an existing one.
Link URL: This is the web address (URL) you want the hyperlink to direct to when clicked. It could be a webpage, a downloadable file, or other online resource. Always ensure the URL is correct and functional.
Text to Display: This is the visible text that will appear in your email and be clickable. This could be a call-to-action like \"Read more, \"Download now\", or simply the name of the webpage you're linking to. It's best to keep this text concise and descriptive of its linked content.
Title: The title attribute is optional and can provide additional information about the link. It often appears as a tooltip when a user hovers over the hyperlink. It can provide extra context or explain where the link will take the user.
Open Link in New Window: This option, when selected, means that when the recipient clicks the link, it will open in a new browser window or tab instead of the current one. This can be useful when you don't want the user to navigate away from the email or the current webpage.
Link List: This drop-down menu could contain a list of previously used or saved links. It can make adding links you frequently use quicker and easier.
You can also adjust text alignment and line height or introduce bullet points to your text.
Here is a description of each bullet point type:
Disc: A filled circle. This is the default style for unordered lists in HTML.
Circle: An empty circle or a ring. This is typically used for secondary or tertiary points in an unordered list.
Square: A filled square. This can be an alternative to disc or circle bullets for variety or emphasis.
Decimal: Standard numerical (1, 2, 3, etc.) list markers. Typically used for ordered lists where sequence matters.
Lower Alpha: Lowercase alphabetical (a, b, c, etc.) list markers. These are often used for sub-points within an ordered list.
Lower Greek: Lowercase Greek alphabetical (alpha, beta, gamma, etc.) list markers. Not commonly used, but it can be an interesting alternative to standard markers.
Lower Roman: Lowercase Roman numeral (i, ii, iii, etc.) list markers. Often used for formal or traditional documents, such as legal documents.
Upper Alpha: Uppercase alphabetical (A, B, C, etc.) list markers. These are often used for main points in an ordered list.
Upper Roman: Uppercase Roman numeral (I, II, III, etc.) list markers. Like lowercase Roman numerals, these are often used in formal or traditional documents.
Using Advanced Editing Options
The inline editor also comes equipped with advanced editing options. The 'Clear Format' feature lets you strip any existing formatting from a section of the text, a handy tool when pasting text from external sources.
Custom values: They bring a personalized touch to your emails by incorporating specific recipient details such as their name or location. This personalization can improve your email's relevance to each recipient, thereby improving engagement rates.
Trigger links:They allow recipients to perform certain actions directly from the email, such as confirming a subscription, unsubscribing, or accessing a special offer. These interactive elements can drive engagement and boost conversions by simplifying user actions.
Moreover, the 'ContentAI' feature leverages artificial intelligence to help generate text content. The tool can automatically generate relevant text content for you by providing content titles, descriptions, and keywords. More on that in
Context: In this field, you can specify the context for the content you want the AI to generate. This helps the AI understand what the general theme or topic should be. This could be anything from \"Digital Marketing\" to \"Healthy Recipes\". The more specific your context, the more accurate your generated content will be.
Content Title: Here, you should provide the main theme or idea for the content you want to create. This title will guide the AI in generating the content that you want. It could be a blog title, a subject line for an email, or a product description.
Provide a brief content description: In this field, you need to provide a brief description of the desired content. This could include any specific details or angles you want the AI to consider when generating the content.
Add keywords: Keywords are the specific words or phrases describing your content. These will guide the AI in incorporating these terms naturally into the generated content. This can be especially helpful for SEO purposes.
Writing Tone: This option allows you to define the tone of the writing. It could be professional, friendly, informal, authoritative, etc. The AI will adapt the generated content to match the selected tone.
Number of Variations: Here, you specify how many different versions of the content you want the AI to generate. This allows you to choose from various outputs and select the one that best fits your needs. You can create up to five variations.
Managing Elements
The 'Manage Elements' function gives you control over each element within your email. Selecting an element in this section allows you to modify its visibility for different devices - desktop, mobile, or both.
Visibility settings allow you to control how certain elements appear on different devices. Specifically, \"mobile visibility\" and \"desktop visibility\" settings allow you to choose which elements of your email or webpage should be displayed when viewed on a desktop or mobile device.
Mobile Visibility refers to how your email or webpage elements appear on mobile devices like smartphones or tablets. Given the smaller screen sizes of these devices, you might opt to hide certain elements that don't display well or simplify your content for easier mobile consumption. It can also involve restructuring or resizing elements for a more mobile-friendly layout.
Desktop Visibility refers to how your email or webpage elements are viewed on desktop devices. Since desktop screens are larger and provide more space, you can include additional elements that wouldn't fit well on a mobile screen. Also, elements that require hover actions, which are not applicable on mobile devices, can be displayed.
Moreover, each element can be edited independently, allowing you to change its properties.
You can remove an element from the 'Manage Elements' section if it doesn't fit into your email.
Whenever you hover over and click a section, column, or element in the Manage Elements section, the screen scrolls to the section, column, or element you are hovering your cursor over.
Adjusting Appearance and Styling
The 'Appearance' function is your go-to place for tweaking your template's look and feel.
Template
Here you can choose the color scheme for your template, upload a background image, and even define the width of your email's content.
Background Color: This is the color that appears behind all the content in your email. You can select any color that suits the design and mood of your message. Well-chosen background color can significantly enhance your email's readability and visual appeal.
Custom values in color fields (real-time rendering)
You can use Custom Values in color inputs (for example, Background Color, Body Color, or Button Color).
When you enter a Custom Value token, the builder applies the color instantly on the canvas. You do not need to switch to Preview mode to confirm color changes.
Body Color: This is your email's main content area or body color. It's where your text, images, and other elements are housed. The body color should provide a good contrast with your text and other elements to ensure readability.
Content Width: This is the width of the content area inside your email. By default, it might be set to a standard width of 600 pixels. However, you can adjust this based on your design needs and the kind of content you're including. Note that very wide content might not display well on all screens, especially mobile devices.
Background Image: Here, you can upload an image that will be displayed as the background of your email. This can be a great way to add visual interest and branding to your messages. Remember that not all email clients support background images, so having a fallback color set is a good idea.
Maximum upload size refers to the largest image file you can upload as your background. Larger files can take longer to load and may not be fully supported by all email clients, so it's usually best to use optimized web-friendly images.
Background Image URL: Instead of uploading an image from your computer, you can input a URL of an image hosted online externally or on your CRM's Media Library. The email will load the image from this URL when it's opened. Ensure the image URL is secure (HTTPS) and reliable to load properly for all recipients.
Button:
The \"Button\" section in the appearance settings allows you to design and stylize action-oriented buttons for interactive and engaging emails.
Corner Radius: Modify the roundness of your button's corners. A value of 9 will give it moderately rounded edges.
Button Color: Here, you can specify the button's color to match your brand or the theme of your email.
Font: Choose the font type and size for the text on your button. In this case, the font 'Arial' with a size of '16' is selected.
Text Styling:
You have the ability to set individual colors for the bold, italic, and underlined text within the button. This can help emphasize keywords or phrases and create more visually dynamic buttons.
Divider:
The \"Divider\" section in the appearance settings lets you incorporate customized lines for structuring and segregating email content.
Height: The height setting defines the thickness of the divider line. By default, it is set to 2 pixels, but you can modify it to suit the aesthetic of your email. A thicker divider might be more noticeable, while a thinner one can subtly separate sections.
Color: This setting allows you to choose the color of the divider line. The color should ideally complement the overall color scheme of the email, ensuring visual cohesion.
Style: Here, you can select the look of the divider line.
Custom CSS:
The \"Custom CSS\" section allows you to add CSS styles to customize your email layout further. However, this requires a good understanding of CSS and its implications in email design. CSS in emails works slightly differently than in web design due to the variety of email clients and their rendering capabilities.
Here are a few resources that can help you get started:
CSS Tricks: This website provides a wealth of information about CSS and how to use it effectively, including many articles specifically about using CSS in email.
Litmus: Litmus is a well-known email testing tool, and its blog features many in-depth articles about email coding, including CSS.
MDN Web Docs: Using CSS: Mozilla's developer network is a trusted resource for web developers. This guide explains how to use CSS custom properties, which can be useful in your custom CSS block.
Can I email…: Like Can I use… but for email. A great resource for checking which CSS properties and HTML elements are supported by major email clients.
Mobile Formatting
In today's world, it's important that your emails look good on all devices. With that in mind, the Email Builder Inline Editor provides a special section for mobile formatting. Here, you can specify which headings, paragraphs, and buttons should be visible when your email is viewed on a mobile device. This ensures that your emails are optimized for both desktop and mobile viewing.
These configurations will solely affect the mobile rendition of your email template and are applicable in email clients that are compatible with media queries.
Heading H1:
Font Size: The size of your primary header on mobile should be large enough to grab attention but not so large that it dominates the screen or causes scrolling. The mobile viewing experience differs considerably from the desktop due to the smaller screen size, so finding a balance is key.
Text Alignment: Alignment in mobile view can influence how easily your content is digested. Center alignment is often used for mobile as it provides balance and fits well with the vertical nature of mobile screens.
Line Height: In the mobile view, adequate line spacing is even more critical for readability due to the smaller screen. The 1.5 setting provides a comfortable reading experience.
Heading H2:
Font Size: This setting defines the size of your secondary headers on a mobile screen. Smaller than H1, but still prominent enough to distinguish the information hierarchy.
Text Alignment: As with H1, center alignment often works well for mobile viewing, but the optimal alignment can depend on your specific content and design.
Line Height: The same principles apply here as with H1. Line height is critical in how easily readers can move from one line to the next, particularly on smaller mobile screens.
Heading H3:
Font Size: Your tertiary headers should be distinct but not overpowering. A smaller font size differentiates H3 from H1 and H2 headers but should still be readable on mobile screens.
Text Alignment: The alignment for H3 may vary based on your specific design needs and content. Keeping it consistent with H1 and H2 usually aids in visual coherence.
Line Height: Appropriate line height can ensure your content is accessible and easy to read, even on small screens.
Paragraph:
Font Size: Paragraph text should be comfortable to read on a mobile screen, which often means slightly larger font sizes than you might use on a desktop.
Text Alignment: Paragraphs in mobile view are typically justified to the left for languages that read left-to-right, but this can depend on your specific content and design needs.
Line Height: Maintaining comfortable line spacing in paragraph text is especially crucial for long-form content. It makes the text less dense and easier to follow on small screens.
Button:
Font Size: The text on buttons should be easy to read and click on a mobile device. Larger font size can help prevent misclicks and make calls-to-action more clear.
Remember, these are all starting points - depending on your content, audience, and overall design, you might need to adjust these settings to achieve the optimal mobile viewing experience.
Email Mobile View Configuration Best Practices
When configuring mobile emails, you need to pay close attention to a few key areas that contribute to the overall usability and effectiveness of your emails:
Use a Single-Column Layout: Single-column layouts work best for mobile as they are easier to scale down for smaller screens. Multiple columns can get cluttered on a mobile screen and may be confusing for users to navigate.
Optimize Images: Ensure your images are of high quality but also keep the file size small for quick loading. Consider using responsive images that will automatically adjust to fit the screen they're viewed on. Don't forget to include alt text for accessibility.
Touch-Friendly Buttons: On mobile devices, your CTAs will most likely be tapped with a finger rather than clicked with a mouse. Ensure your buttons are large enough to be easily tapped - a minimum size of 44px by 44px is recommended.
Limit Text Amount: On mobile devices, lengthy text can be daunting. Be concise and break your text into small, manageable chunks. Make use of bullet points and subheadings for easy readability.
Use a Responsive Email Design: This will ensure that your email will automatically adjust to fit the screen of any device it's viewed on.
Preview and Test: Always preview and test your emails on different devices and email clients to ensure they display correctly.
Include White Space: White space isn't wasted space. It makes your email cleaner and easier to read on a small screen.
Font Size and Style: Keep your font size large enough to be readable on small screens. A size of 14 for text and 22 for headlines is often recommended. Avoid fancy fonts that might be difficult to read.
Clear and Concise CTAs: Make sure your call-to-action is clear, concise, and easy to find. The best place for a CTA button is generally in the middle of the screen.
Optimize Subject Lines and Preheader Text: Keep your subject lines short and engaging, and utilize the preheader text to provide a summary or teaser of your email content. It's also a good idea to A/B test different versions of subject lines to find what works best for your audience.
Opt for Plain Text Over Images: Some email clients may not automatically display images. To ensure your message gets across, use text as much as possible and only use images when necessary.
Unsubscribe Option: Make it easy for recipients to opt out of your emails. Not only is this a legal requirement, but it also improves user experience.
Accessibility: Make your email accessible to everyone. This includes using larger fonts, ensuring good contrast between text and background, and including alt text for images.
Remember, the best practices for mobile email configuration may vary depending on your specific audience and the type of content you're sending. Always test different approaches to see what works best for your audience.
Here are some resources that could help further consolidate the mobile email design best practices:
Users can now easily include a “Preview in Browser” link to accurately represent the email design, to their new and existing campaigns.
How to Add:
Default Inclusion
: All blank email templates will now include the “Preview in Browser” link at the top by default.
Manual Addition to existing campaigns/ templates:
Navigate to email marketing and open any campaign/template.
Add the element - Preview URL.
Customize the text styling/formatting by editing or using the add link option
How to test it?
You can preview the email and click on the preview link to view the browser version of the document.
You can also send a test email and click on the view in browser link.
Note
: If under the settings, agency or location has provided API Domain, it will be used by default in the preview URL adhering to whitelabel guidelines.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: I want to test different email elements to see what works best. How can the email builder help?
You can utilize the A/B testing feature, which is supported as mentioned here: A/B Testing Guide. This allows you to test different email components, such as subject lines, content, and CTAs, to see what resonates with your audience.
Q: I own a restaurant and want to inform customers about our new menu items. Which template should I use?
Use the \"Restaurant Generic\" template. This offers a variety of layouts suitable for showcasing new dishes.
Q: I run a law firm and need to announce new services. Which template will work best for this?
The \"Legal Minds\" or \"Justice Law Firm\" templates are useful. They are professional and perfect for showcasing services.
Q: I manage a charity organization. How can I use the email builder to solicit donations?
Use the \"Helping Hand Charity\" or \"Giving Back Foundation\" templates to create compelling messages about your cause and the importance of donations.
Q: I have a physical therapy clinic and want to share health tips and exercises with my clients. Which template should I use?
The \"Physical Therapy\" templates are designed for sharing health tips and exercise information.
Q: I run an accounting firm and want to send newsletters with tips for financial management. Which template would work best?
Use the \"Accurate Accounting Agency\" or \"Accounting Generic\" templates. They are perfect for sharing financial tips and advice.
Q: I manage a real estate agency. How can I use the email builder to showcase new properties?
You can use any of the \"Real Estate\" templates. Each offers a professional layout for showcasing properties.
Q: I run a beauty salon and want to announce new services and promotions. Which template should I use?
The \"Radiance Beauty\" or \"Hair Salon Generic\" templates would be perfect. They are designed to highlight beauty services and offers.
Q: I run a travel agency and want to promote our vacation packages. What would you recommend?
The \"Pinnacle Travel\" and \"Getaways Travel\" templates are designed to showcase travel packages.
Q: I run a dental practice and want to send check-up reminders. Which template is best for this?
The \"Dentist\" templates are designed for dental practices.
Q: I manage a yoga studio and want to share class schedules and health tips. Which template would you suggest?
Use any \"Yoga Generic\" or numbered \"Yoga\" templates. They are perfect for sharing class schedules and health tips.
Q: I run an auto repair shop. How can I use the email builder to announce our services and promotions?
You can use the \"Auto Repair\" templates to promote your services and offers.
Q: I own a gym and want to share fitness tips and class schedules with my clients. What would you recommend?
You should consider using any of the \"Gym\" templates. They are designed specifically for fitness-related content.
Q: I run a holistic wellness center and want to share wellness tips with my clients. Which template should I use?
The \"Holistic Wellness Image Layer Generic\" template would be an excellent choice. It's perfect for wellness tips and advice.
Q: I operate a medspa and want to announce new treatments and promotions. Which template is best for this?
The \"MedSpa\" templates are designed for showcasing treatments and offers in a Medspa.
Q: I run a landscaping service. How can I use the email builder to showcase my work?
The \"Landscaping Image Layer Generic 1\" template offers a professional layout for showcasing landscaping work and services.
Q: I run a credit score company and want to share financial advice. What template would be most suitable?
Use the \"Credit Score\" templates. They are specially designed for sharing financial advice and tips.
Q: I manage a solar energy company. Which template should I use to announce new products and services?
The \"Solar Generic\" or numbered \"Solar\" templates are ideal for showcasing solar products and services.
Q: I own a law firm and want to send newsletters with legal advice. Which template would work best?
You can use the \"Attorney Generic\" or \"Legal Minds\" templates for sharing legal advice and updates.
Q: I run a climbing gym. How can I use the email builder to promote our training classes?
Use the \"Peak Climbing\" template to showcase your climbing classes and training sessions.
Q: I manage a pet shelter and want to send updates about available pets for adoption. Which template should I use?
The \"Dog Shelter\" and \"Cat's Cradle\" templates are perfect for promoting pets available for adoption.
Content AI is a powerful AI-powered assistant designed to generate high-quality content, including text and images, to enhance productivity. It's an innovative tool that can help users craft unique social media posts, focusing on creating realistic images from descriptive natural language. Whether you're building a digital art representation or a realistic photo, Content AI makes content creation a breeze with easy activation and an intuitive interface.
Image Generation using Content AI is an innovative feature that creates unique images based on user-provided descriptions. It's a crucial part of the Social Planner platform, where it assists users in making their social media posts more engaging and visually appealing.
With Social Planner, users can plan their social media content, while Image Generation using Content AI handles the creative aspect. Users input a description of the image they want to create in natural language, choose the number of variations they wish to see, and select the Style for the image.
Content AI then processes this information and generates a unique image that aligns with the description and style preferences. This feature is particularly useful for content creators, marketers, and social media managers, as it allows them to create custom images for their posts without needing advanced graphic design skills.
What are some usage cases for this feature?
Social Media Campaigns: An agency preparing a campaign for a client's new organic skincare line can generate various images with \"A minimalist organic skincare product set against a backdrop of natural greenery.\"
Promotional Events: When promoting an upcoming webinar, you can create engaging visuals with the description, \"A digital webinar invite with a sleek laptop, a hot cup of coffee, and a notepad on a desk.\"
Brand Awareness Posts: Boost brand visibility with posts like \"An inspirational workspace showcasing a logo-branded mug and stationary.\"
Client Testimonials: Turn textual client testimonials into engaging visuals. For instance, an image of a \"happy client holding a sign with a positive testimonial\" can be created.
Holiday Greetings: You can schedule a series of holiday-related posts using images from descriptions like \"A warm, cozy winter scene with a cup of hot chocolate and a message of Happy Holidays.\"
Educational Content: You can create informational posts related to industry insights. For example, \"An engaging infographic on latest social media trends.\"
Product Launches: For a client releasing a new line of sneakers, generate images with \"A trendy pair of sneakers on a graffiti background.\"
Content Series: You're running a 'Tip of the Week' series on productivity hacks. Generate images using descriptions like \"A serene home office with a tip on time management overlay.\"
Employee Features: Spotlight team members by generating images with descriptions such as \"A professional portrait of [employee name] with a brief bio.\"
Themed Posts: For something like a 'Throwback Thursday,' generate images that fit the theme, for example, \"A vintage-style photo of an old-style typewriter with a caption about how marketing has evolved.\"
Competitive advantages of Image AI:
AI-Generated Imagery: Unlike platforms like HubSpot, Salesforce, Zoho CRM, Sprout Social, and Hootsuite, this tool goes beyond standard social media management features by providing AI-powered image generation. This means that users can produce unique, engaging visuals from simple textual descriptions, not merely from a repository of pre-existing stock images.
Unprecedented Creativity and Customization: The capacity to generate images in many styles – from photography to fine art to digital art – introduces customization and creativity that other CRMs like Salesforce and HubSpot don't offer. This opens up a world of possibilities for brand expression, enabling users to design more personalized and brand-consistent visuals.
Unified Content Creation Process: By merging social post planning with AI-powered image creation, content production becomes seamless and efficient. Unlike using Zoho CRM or Sprout Social, where you might need to juggle different platforms for image sourcing and post-scheduling, this feature allows users to plan and create all within a single platform.
Efficiency in Time and Resources: The use of AI for image generation helps to eliminate the necessity for a dedicated graphic designer or the time-consuming task of scouring image repositories – an advantage over traditional social media management tools like Hootsuite. This results in significant savings in time, effort, and financial resources.
Scalability: With AI-powered image generation, the capacity to produce content scales with your needs. Whether creating a few social posts or launching a comprehensive campaign, this feature can support your efforts more effectively than conventional tools offered by CRMs like Salesforce or Zoho.
How to use Image AI in the Social Planner?
Please Note:
Image AI needs you to have Content AI enabled for that account for it to work, please refer to this article on how to enable Content AI.
Things to keep in mind:
Avoid Promotional Language: Words like \"discount,\" \"sale,\" or another promotional verbiage may not translate well in the context of image generation. The AI does not understand these concepts as humans do, and it may confuse the generation process leading to results that may not meet your expectations.
Describe Realistically: The AI generates images based on the specific elements you describe. Therefore, it's best to provide descriptions that resemble real-world scenarios. For instance, instead of saying \"20% discount on shoes,\" describe the scene as \"A stylish pair of running shoes placed next to a gym bag.\"
Be Clear and Concise: While creative, ensure your description is clear and concise. Overly complex or vague descriptions might lead to inaccurate image generation. For example, instead of saying, \"an exciting place where kids have fun,\" you could say, \"A colorful children's playground with slides and swings.\"
Avoid Symbols: As the AI interprets symbols differently, avoid including them in your descriptions. For example, using the \"$\" sign to imply something is expensive might not give the expected result. Instead, describe it as \"A luxurious diamond necklace in a velvet box.\"
Specify Important Details: If certain elements are crucial for your image, mention them. For instance, if you're describing a room and a certain color scheme is essential, include that. Specific.
Experiment and Learn: The more you use the tool, the better you'll understand what type of descriptions yield the best results. Don't hesitate to try various descriptions and styles to see what works best for your needs.
-Social-Planner->-New-Post\">Step 1: Go to Marketing > Social Planner > New Post
Please Note:
Enable the permissions for users to use Content AI in sub accounts by heading to Settings> My Staff> Edit a user> User Permissions.
Step 2: Select the social you want to publish once you create a new post.
Step 3: Click on the Image upload icon and select the Generate Image with AI option in the dropdown.
Step 4: For generating the image
Describe the image - Enter the description of the picture. Content AI will generate realistic images and art from a description in natural language.
Choose the number of Variations -Choose the Number of variations from 1 to 5
Choose Style for the image -
Three style categories arePhotography, Digital Art, and Fine Art.
Please Note:
Please avoid words like discount, sale or any symbols in the description. Please describe in realistic manner as given in example.
Example 1
Describe the image -
A vibrant fruit salad in a glass bowl
Choose the number of Variations - Select two variations
Choose a style for the image - 3D Model
Example 2
Describe the image -
Serene sunrise over a mountain range
Choose the number of Variations - Select four variations
Choose a style for the image - Photo
Step 5: If the details of the image are as per your requirements, click Continue.
FAQs
Q: How many styles can I generate for the image?
Content AI provides photo, film, Dreamlike, Digital Art, Poster, Vector, Colorful, 3D Models, Pastel Art, Sketch, Watercool, and Color Pencils.
Q: I want to check the old image-generated content. Where can I check it out?
To check the generated content via Content AI, go to Automation> Content AI to learn more details and see the various content generated.
Q: Can Content AI help me create a series of themed images for a social media campaign?
A: Absolutely! You can use consistent descriptions and styles in Content AI to create a series of related images to provide a unified aesthetic for your campaign.
Q: What happens if I provide a fantasy or abstract description?
A: Content AI is versatile and can interpret and generate images from various descriptions, including fantasy or abstract ones. However, the results may vary based on the specifics of the description. It's always worth trying out!
Q: How can I leverage the 'number of variations' feature for my social media strategy?
A: The 'number of variations' feature allows you to explore different interpretations of your image description. This can be particularly useful for A/B testing, enabling you to understand which type of visuals resonate best with your audience.
Q: Is there a limit to how many AI-generated images I can create?
A: As of my last update, there isn't a specific limit. However, usage policies may vary, so checking the current terms and conditions for accurate information is recommended.
Q: Can Content AI create animations or GIFs based on my description?
A: Content AI is designed for static image generation as of the last update. It may not support animations or GIFs.
Q: Can Content AI understand and interpret metaphors in the image description?
A: While Content AI can interpret a wide range of descriptions, it might struggle with metaphors as they require a level of abstract thinking that AI has not fully mastered yet. It's recommended to use literal, clear descriptions for best results.
This help article provides a clear, step-by-step guide on how to enable and rebill External AI Models within the SourCherry platform. Workflow - External AI Models are designed to enhance automation by using artificial intelligence to streamline workflows, and the article explains how to activate this feature and manage its billing effectively.
- Agencies on Any Plan ($97, $970, $297, $2970, $497, $4970) can access Workflow - External AI Models.
- Once Workflow - External AI Models are enabled via the Agency settings, EXISTING and New Sub-Accounts will have 100 free executions.
- For agencies to avoid accruing execution costs for EXISTING Sub-Accounts, rebilling will need to be enabled manually for each Sub-Account within the Agency view (more info).
- If Workflow - External AI Models are enabled on the SaaS Configurator, new Sub-Accounts generated will automatically be enrolled in External AI Models, no further action is required by the agency.
What are Workflow - External AI Models and Rebilling?
Workflow- External AI Models is a built-in assistant in SourCherry that helps you create and optimize workflows faster using AI-powered suggestions.
Usage incurs costs while using External AI Models. Rebilling allows your agency to pass these charges to clients or sub-accounts, helping you recover expenses and optionally add profit margins.
How to enable External AI Models at the Agency level?
To enable External AI Models for your whole Agency (including all your Sub-Accounts), head into your AgencyLevel > Settings > Company > Workflow - External AI Models and enable the toggle.
Check the box \"I confirm that I agree to the Workflow - External AI Models terms.\" And then hit Enable.
You can enable or disable the Workflow - External AI Models feature or rebill for each Sub-Account in Agency Settings > Workflow - External AI Models. You can access Sub-Account Settings only if External AI Models are enabled at the Agency Level.
Please Note:
Agencies on Any Plan ($97, $970, $297, $2970, $497, $4970) can access Workflow - External AI Models.
Workflow - External AI Models Pricing
Users will be charged what OpenAI charges us. No charges/commission will be added.If re-billing is enabled then charge will be inclusive of rebilling multiplier(see below for more info).
You will be charged based on the input and output tokens used by you. It is transparent, we charge you what Open AI charges us. No hidden charges.
GPT-4o (per million tokens)
Input - $5
Output - $20.00
GPT-4o-mini (per million tokens)
Input - $0.60
Output - $2.40
Re-billing the costs to your clients and making a profit
(only for 497 SaaS Agencies)
Once you have enabled Workflow - External AI Models in your agency account, it will be automatically enabled for all your clients to use.
You can bill your clients at cost or add markup.
How to turn on re-billing for my clients?
Ensure you have enabled Workflow - External AI Models for your Agency first. (see instructions)
If the sub-account isn't in SaaS Mode already, switch the sub-account into SaaS Mode by going into your Agency account > Accounts tab > Scroll to the sub-account > Click the three dots icon and select \"Switch to SaaS.\" How to convert a location to SaaS.
In Agency account > Accounts tab > Scroll to the Sub-Account > Click the View Details link > Scroll to the Workflow - External AI Models Re-Sell Settings section and toggle it on.
Use the slider to set the amount of markup you like to make and hit save!
Rinse and repeat for all your Sub-Accounts where you wish to rebill for usage.
How does re-billing work?
Agencies pay SourCherry and get invoices with high-level branding
This is very similar to other products that use re-billing or reselling models in the platform. Just like LC Phone or LC Email re-billing, re-billing of the Premium Workflow actions also utilizes \"credits\" from the agency wallet & the location wallet, respectively.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I customize the billing settings for Workflow - External AI Models to fit specific needs or usage patterns?
The article provides general guidelines for enabling and rebilling External AI Models, but specific customization options for billing settings might not be covered. If you need to tailor billing based on usage patterns or other factors, reach out to SourCherry support to explore available customization options and ensure they meet your specific requirements.
Q: How do I handle billing discrepancies or disputes related to Workflow - External AI Models charges?
If you encounter billing discrepancies or disputes related to Workflow - External AI ModelsI charges, start by reviewing your billing reports and comparing them to your usage data to identify any inconsistencies. Contact SourCherry’s billing support team with detailed information about the discrepancy to resolve the issue. They can provide assistance in adjusting charges or clarifying billing details.
Welcome to the GPT Powered by OpenAI Action, the tool that simplifies your business operations. It's built on advanced AI, handling complex tasks swiftly and efficiently. Say goodbye to tedious manual processes and hello to a whole new era of streamlined workflows with GPT Action. Click here to learn how to enable it for your clients.
GPT action is a revolutionary workflow action that harnesses the power of artificial intelligence to enhance your business automation strategies. It integrates seamlessly with your CRM, responding intelligently to various triggers and actions to streamline your workflows. Utilizing advanced models like GPT-4 and GPT-5, this action generates dynamic and contextually aware responses, enriching your communication processes. It interoperates with various platforms, from social media to e-commerce and learning management systems, enabling diverse applications. Workflow action also supports intricate data formatting and computations, further ensuring precision and efficiency in your operations. As a workflow action, the GPT action empowers your business to be more proactive, responsive, and adaptable.
Use Cases in Symphony with other Workflow Actions and triggers
Public Figures' social media Auto-responder: Use Inbound Webhooks from supported social media platforms to trigger a GPT action response. The response can be a general appreciation message for every new follower or a direct message.
Automated Birthday Wishes: Trigger a 'Birthday Reminder' to activate GPT action, sending a standard birthday wish to email or SMS to contacts.
Fitness Progress Updates: Once a 'Lesson Completed' trigger is activated in a fitness app, the workflow could send the user progress updates via SMS or email.
E-commerce Abandoned Cart Recovery: Upon an 'Abandoned Checkout' trigger from Shopify, send a GPT action-generated reminder email or SMS about the abandoned carts.
Automated Webinar Follow-ups: Using the CRM's 'Appointment Status' trigger after a webinar, the workflow could send all attendees a follow-up email via GPT action.
Real Estate Opportunity Management: Upon the 'Opportunity Status Changed' trigger, automatically update Google Sheets with new data and send update emails to potential clients.
Course Completion Certificates:After 'Product Completed' is triggered in an online course, use GPT action to generate a congratulatory message and certificate to be sent to the course finisher.
Automated Restaurant Reservation Confirmation: When 'Customer Booked Appointment' is triggered, the workflow could send a GPT action-generated confirmation message with booking details.
Product Recommendations: After 'Order Placed' from Shopify, a preliminary step fetches relevant product data, which feeds into GPT action to generate product recommendations via email or SMS.
Post-Purchase Survey: Trigger 'Payment Received' to activate GPT action, sending customers a thank-you message and a post-purchase survey link.
Job Application Auto-responder: Using the CRM's native forms for job applications, once a 'Form Submitted' trigger is activated, it could trigger a GPT action response, sending an acknowledgment to each applicant.
Study Plans: Upon 'Lesson Started', trigger a workflow to create a study plan using GPT action and send it to the student via email or SMS.
Financial Advice: After 'Payment Received' is triggered, use GPT action to generate financial advice based on payment history and send it via email or SMS.
CRM Event Follow-up: After the 'Order Submitted' trigger is activated, the workflow could send a follow-up email via GPT action, asking for feedback on the customer's shopping experience.
Automated E-commerce Product Reviews: After an 'Order Fulfilled' trigger from Shopify, use GPT action to email the customer requesting a product review.
TikTok Influencer Campaign Management: Upon 'TikTok Form Submitted', the workflow could automatically add the influencer to the Affiliate Manager and send them a welcome message via GPT action.
Automated Event RSVPs: Use an 'Inbound Webhook' from an event registration form to trigger a GPT action response, sending an RSVP confirmation to each registrant.
Fitness Goal Tracking: After a 'Task Reminder' trigger related to a workout schedule, use GPT action to send updates and motivation to the user.
Client Onboarding in SaaS Companies: Upon 'Membership New Signup', use GPT action to send a welcome message and onboarding instructions to the new user.
Hotel Booking Confirmation: Upon the 'Customer Booked Appointment' trigger, the workflow could send a GPT action-generated confirmation message with hotel booking details.
How to set up GPT Action?
Create a workflow or use an existing workflow. After adding an appropriate Workflow Trigger, Scroll to Actions and add the GPT powered by OpenAI Action:
1. Select Model: Users will be able to select from a \"Model\" to select. By default, GPT 5 Mini will be selected but the users will have the option to select other GPT models as well including:
2. Prompt: Ask ChatGPT for anything to generate completions for. E.g., Could you generate a response for a customer message?
Dynamic prompts can be created by utilizing custom values.
3. Temperature (Advanced options): Sampling temperature refers to the parameter used in generating AI text with varying levels of randomness. It is set between the range of 0.1 and 1. Higher values, such as 0.8, result in more diverse and random output. In contrast, lower values, like 0.2, produce more focused and predictable responses. Adjusting the sampling temperature allows users to customize the level of creativity and control in the AI-generated content.
4. Output: After setting up ChatGPT, you can use the results in further actions in your Workflow. {{chatgpt.1.response}}
The GPT-Generated Output
After selecting and configuring the desired AI model, incorporate a 'GPT powered by OpenAI' action into your workflow to generate dynamic output aligned with your configured prompts.\"
1. Enter your Own prompt
E.g., \"Write a follow-up email based on this message: {{contact.message}}\"
2. Use Dynamic Variables (Optional):
Insert dynamic fields like {{contact.first_name}} or {{event.notes}} into your prompt to personalize the output.
3. Test or Run the Workflow:
Once the action is added, you can test the workflow using a contact to see the GPT output in action. The AI output can be used in subsequent workflow steps (e.g., send as an email or SMS).
IMPORTANT: If you are concerned about where does the output go. The AI-generated content can be:-
1. Stored in Custom Fields
2. Used directly in Email or SMS steps
3. Logged internally or sent to a team via Slack/Webhook
Sample Prompts
1. Generate a response - Reply to customer message. Prompt:
Your name is {{user.name}}. You are a helpful, creative, clever, and very friendly assistant. Generate a best response email to {{contact.name}} from {{user.name}} for the below message. {{message.body}}
2. Generate Email/SMS content - Dynamic content for emails/sms. Prompt:
Generate email content without subject to promote the product in this link YOUR_WEBSITE to {{contact.name}} from {{user.name}}
Frequently Asked Questions
Q. Can I customize the behavior and responses of the GPT Action?
Absolutely! You can configure the GPT action by setting the desired temperature, which controls the randomness of the generated responses. Higher temperatures produce more creative but less predictable responses, while lower temperatures produce more focused and deterministic outputs.
Q. Are there any limitations or considerations when using the GPT Action?
While the GPT action offers powerful capabilities, it's important to note that it relies on the underlying ChatGPT model. The responses generated by the AI may not always be perfect, and it's recommended to review and validate the output before sending it to customers. Additionally, extensive testing and monitoring are crucial to ensure the quality and accuracy of the generated responses.
Q. Can I use other Workflow actions and Triggers with the GPT Action?
Absolutely! The GPT Action can seamlessly integrate with other Workflow actions and Triggers to enhance the capabilities of your workflows. Here are some examples:
1. Custom Lead Qualification:
Trigger: Inbound Webhook with lead data.
Action: Engage with the lead using ChatGPT within the GPT action. Based on the conversation, use other Workflow actions to qualify the lead and trigger appropriate actions, such as assigning a sales representative or updating the lead status.
2. Intelligent Customer Support:
Trigger: Customer Replied or Inbound Webhook with support ticket data.
Action: Utilize ChatGPT within the GPT action to understand the customer's query or issue. I'd like you to combine it with other Workflow actions to generate a well-informed and personalized response. Additional actions can include updating the ticket status, assigning it to a support agent, or sending a response via email.
3. Dynamic Content Generation:
Trigger: Inbound Webhook with a dynamic content request.
Action: Generate dynamic content using ChatGPT within the GPT Action. I'd like you to combine it with other Workflow actions to process the generated content, make modifications or validations, and deliver it through the desired communication channel.
4. Contextual Sales Recommendations:
Trigger: Contact Changed or Inbound Webhook with contact data.
Action: Analyze the contact's profile and previous interactions using ChatGPT within the GPT Action. Based on this analysis, use other Workflow actions to generate personalized sales recommendations. These recommendations can be sent via email, SMS, or integrated with a CRM dashboard for the sales team.
5. Automated Event Registrations:
Trigger: Inbound Webhook with event registration data.
Action: Confirm event registrations and provide additional details using ChatGPT within the GPT action. Combine it with other Workflow actions to process registration data, update attendee lists, and send personalized event reminders or follow-up messages based on the ChatGPT-generated content.
By combining the power of the GPT Action with other Workflow actions and Triggers, you can create intelligent and dynamic workflows that automate processes, personalize interactions, and streamline your business operations.
Make it easier for leads and customers to schedule time with your business by letting Conversation AI handle appointment booking automatically. SourCherry can book appointments through Conversation AI across supported channels, collect the contact details you need, and guide the conversation toward the right calendar based on your setup. You can also extend the experience with multiple calendar selection, fallback routing, cancellations, reschedules, and post-booking automation for a smoother customer journey.
Appointment booking in Conversation AI allows a SourCherry bot to talk with contacts, gather the required information, offer available time slots, and book appointments on a selected booking calendar. Depending on how your bot is configured, it can support a single calendar or route requests across multiple calendars using intent-based matching. It can also work alongside broader bot settings, training, and automation so your team can reduce manual scheduling work while keeping the conversation natural and on-brand.
Key Benefits of Appointment Booking in Conversation AI
Automated scheduling: lets the bot collect contact details, present available times, and complete the booking without manual back-and-forth.
Smarter routing: helps the bot choose the right calendar when you configure multiple calendars with descriptions, keywords, and optional fallback behavior.
Better customer experience: supports fast replies across supported channels and reduces delays when contacts want to book, cancel, or reschedule.
Operational efficiency: allows your team to trigger workflows, pause the bot after booking, or hand off to the right process after an appointment is scheduled.
More accurate follow-up conversations: recent appointment context can help the bot avoid repeated booking prompts and answer follow-up questions more naturally.
Before You Begin
A successful booking setup depends on having the right calendar and bot foundation in place before you turn on appointment booking. This helps prevent missing slots, poor routing, and incomplete responses when contacts ask follow-up questions.
Before setting up appointment booking in Conversation AI, make sure you have:
SourCherry booking calendar already configured
Conversation AI bot created in the sub-account
Brand voice or Bot training setup that reflects your business accurately
The channels selected where you want the bot to respond
A clear plan for whether the bot should book on one calendar or route across multiple calendars
How Appointment Booking Works in Conversation AI
Appointment booking works by combining your bot goals, calendar selection, bot training, and response behavior into one scheduling experience. When a contact asks to book an appointment, the bot can collect required details, check availability from the connected calendar, suggest time slots, and confirm the booking inside the conversation. In more advanced setups, the bot can also support cancellation and rescheduling, depending on the options you enable.
Single Calendar Booking
Single calendar booking is the best option when all appointment requests should go to one booking calendar. This setup is simpler to manage and works well for businesses with one service type, one scheduling path, or one main appointment destination.
With a single calendar setup, the bot uses the calendar you assign for appointment booking and guides contacts through available time slots for that calendar. This is often the fastest path to launch if you do not need service-based routing.
Multiple Calendar Booking
Multiple calendar booking is ideal when your business offers different appointment types, departments, services, or routing needs. SourCherry supports multiple calendar selection for Conversation AI so the bot can identify the best calendar for the request instead of sending every inquiry to a single destination.
To improve routing accuracy, you can configure each calendar with:
a clear description of what the calendar is for
additional trigger keywords related to the service or use case
an optional fallback calendar if the bot cannot confidently match the request to one calendar
This setup helps the bot distinguish between services such as consultations, demos, support calls, or location-specific bookings.
Note: Multiple calendar booking is currently available only for prompt-based Conversation AI bots.
Prompt and Calendar Setup Best Practices
Good booking performance depends on more than selecting a calendar. The bot also needs the right prompt, training, and business context so it can guide the conversation clearly and answer user questions accurately. Calendar details are used for calendar selection, while information you want the bot to discuss with end users should also be included in the main prompt.
Use these best practices when preparing your bot:
Write clear calendar descriptions so the bot can tell when each calendar should be used.
Add relevant keywords for common services, appointment types, or request phrases.
Put customer-facing business details in the bot’s prompt or training, not only in calendar descriptions.
Keep your initial message and tone aligned with your brand voice.
Choose the contact fields you really need so the booking process stays efficient.
How To Setup Appointment Booking in Conversation AI
A proper setup ensures the bot can understand booking intent, use the right calendar, and respond in a way that feels helpful instead of repetitive. Following these steps also makes it easier to expand later into multi-calendar routing, cancellations, reschedules, or workflow automation.
Go to your SourCherry sub-account and open AI Agents > Conversation AI. Create a new bot or open an existing bot you want to use for appointment booking.
Configure the bot basics, including the bot name, wait time before responding, and initial message. These settings shape how the appointment conversation begins.
Open Bot Goals and choose the contact information you want the bot to collect, such as name, email, or phone number.
Enable Appointment Booking and select the booking calendar you want the bot to use. If you only need one scheduling path, choose a Single Calendar. For Guided and Flow Builder bots, Single Calendar is currently the only available option.
If your business needs service-based routing, select Multiple Calendars and configure each one with a description and any supporting keywords. Add a fallback calendar if you want the bot to route unmatched requests to a default option
Note: Multiple Calendar booking is currently available only for prompt-based Conversation AI bots.
If you want to use a Services Calendar (v2), select Services option. You can choose the public-facing services the AI should handle, and the bot can book using service details such as staff selection, add-ons, and variations. Keep in mind that private services are not supported, and online payment is not collected by the bot during the booking flow.
Note: Services booking is currently available only for prompt-based Conversation AI bots.
Add prompt instructions and training content that explain what the bot should say to contacts about your services, availability expectations, and booking flow. Do not rely only on calendar descriptions for customer-facing information.
Decide whether the bot should also support cancellation and rescheduling. Configure any post-booking behavior you need. This can include sending only the booking link, pausing the bot after an appointment is booked, or triggering one or more workflows after booking.
Save the bot and test the experience carefully. Live testing is especially important for confirming cancellation or reschedule behavior.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Should I use one calendar or multiple calendars? Use one calendar if every appointment request should go to the same booking path. Use multiple calendars when you need the bot to route requests based on service type, department, or intent.
Q: Can the bot cancel or reschedule appointments? Yes, SourCherry supports cancellation and rescheduling options in Conversation AI-related appointment flows when those settings are enabled.
Q: Do calendar descriptions replace prompt instructions? No. Calendar descriptions help the bot choose the right calendar, but customer-facing details should also be included in the main prompt or bot training.
Q: Can appointment booking work inside a flow-based bot? Yes. SourCherry’s Conversation AI Flow Builder includes a Book Appointment AI action and appointment options such as cancel and reschedule.
This article provides a complete list of campaign use case types required for A2P 10DLC registration through SourCherry. Each use case represents the type of messaging your business intends to send, helping ensure compliance with carrier regulations and improving message deliverability.
Campaign use case types represent the specific purpose of your SMS or MMS messages. When registering a campaign, you're required to select a use case that accurately describes the nature of your communication—such as customer care, two-factor authentication, or marketing. Choosing the correct campaign type is essential to meet industry compliance standards, avoid filtering or blocking, and maintain trust with carriers and recipients.
Selecting the right campaign use case helps ensure that your messages are delivered reliably, compliantly, and with minimal delays in the application process.
Reduces the risk of campaign rejection by The Campaign Registry (TCR)
Helps carriers understand message intent and enforce spam filtering
Aligns your messaging practices with industry and legal standards
Supports faster approval and fewer compliance flags
Improves long-term deliverability and reputation
List of Approved Campaign Use Case Types
Below is a table of commonly accepted campaign use case types as defined by The Campaign Registry. Choose the one that best fits your messaging intent when registering your campaign in SourCherry.
Use Case Type
Description
Example
2FA
Two-factor authentication messages for login or identity verification.
\"Your code is 654321.\"
Account Notifications
Updates about account status, changes, or activity.
\"Your billing info was updated.\"
Customer Care
Support or service messages initiated by the customer.
\"We’ve received your request. Here’s the update...\"
Delivery Notifications
Shipping or fulfillment alerts for goods or services.
\"Your package has been delivered.\"
Fraud Alert Messaging
Alerts about suspicious or unauthorized account activity.
\"Did you attempt a $500 withdrawal?\"
Higher Education
Communications from colleges or universities.
\"Class registration is now open.\"
Marketing
Promotional content and sales offers.
\"Save 25% with code SPRING25!\"
Mixed
Combines multiple use cases like marketing + notifications.
Promo + appointment reminder messages.
Polling and Voting
Non-political surveys or voting messages.
\"What feature should we add next?\"
Public Service Announcement
Non-commercial, awareness-based messaging.
\"Flu shots are now available at the clinic.\"
Security Alerts
Notifications about potential system or physical security risks.
\"Unauthorized login attempt detected.\"
Special Campaign Use Cases
Certain campaigns are categorized as \"special\" by carriers and require additional documentation, verification, or pre-qualification. These often involve sensitive or regulated communications. Special use cases may involve different fees, verification requirements, and carrier-specific restrictions.
Charity / 501(c)(3) Nonprofit: For registered nonprofit organizations conducting charitable outreach. Must provide IRS nonprofit verification.
Emergency Services: Used by government agencies to deliver urgent safety or emergency messages. Strictly limited and regulated.
Political: For political messaging, including campaigns, parties, and PACs. Requires verification through Campaign Verify.
Low-Volume Use Cases
In addition to the standard “Mixed” or “Marketing” campaign types, there is a dedicated use case called Low Volume Mixed. This option is intended for businesses with lighter SMS needs. It supports the same range of message types as a standard Mixed campaign—such as marketing, customer care, and notifications—but comes with a lower monthly fee. Unlike other campaign types, Low Volume Mixed is locked to the lowest available throughput tier, regardless of the brand’s Trust Score. This makes it an ideal, cost-effective choice for small businesses or organizations that don’t require high-volume messaging.
\"Third-party\" means originating from any party other than the one owed the debt. For example, a hospital could send messages regarding bills for its patients, assuming they opted-in to receive messaging.
This differs from outreach about employment due to compliant opt-in practices, messages from brokerages to their members, investment news alerts, or other investment-related messages.
Cannabis is federally illegal in the United States. Cannabis businesses will not be permitted to use SMS/MMS messaging in the U.S., regardless of message content. CBD is federally legal but not in some U.S. states, so U.S. carriers do not permit messaging related to CBD. Offers for drugs that cannot be sold over the counter in the U.S./Canada are forbidden.
Gambling
Casino apps, Gambling websites
Gambling traffic is prohibited in the U.S. and Canada on all number types (Toll-Free, Short Code, and Long Code).
\"S.H.A.F.T.\" use cases
Sex, Hate, Alcohol, Firearms, Tobacco
While Tobacco traffic is prohibited on Toll-Free, it is allowed on Short or Long Code, as long as proper age-gating procedures are in place. Alcohol traffic is allowed on Toll-Free (U.S. only), Short Code, and Long Code, as long as proper age-gating procedures are in place. Firearms and Vaping-related traffic are prohibited.
Click here for more information on forbidden use cases.
Need Help Registering?
This article is focused on helping you select the correct campaign use case. If you need help registering your brand or campaign, follow the step-by-step instructions below:
Q: What happens if I choose the wrong campaign use case? Choosing the wrong use case can lead to campaign rejection, delivery filtering, or compliance issues. Always select the use case that best matches the primary intent of your messages.
Q: Can I register more than one campaign use case? Yes. If your business sends different types of messages (e.g., marketing and customer support), you may need to register multiple campaigns, each with its appropriate use case.
Q: Can I switch my campaign use case after it’s approved? No. To change your use case, you'll need to register a new campaign with the updated details and sample messages.
Quickly segment contacts by real engagement signals inside SourCherry. Use Email Analytics to filter by metrics like Opened, Clicked, Bounced, and more — then drill down to the exact contacts driving your results.
LC Email Sub-Accounts Only
Contact-level Email Analytics filtering is available only for LC Email sub-accounts. Non-LC providers do not support this feature.
Email Stat Filtering focuses on contact-level analytics in SourCherry. Sub-accounts can filter contacts by email performance metrics (e.g., Opened, Clicked, Bounced) to understand engagement and take action at the individual contact level.
Instead of sifting through campaign summaries, you jump straight to the people who opened, clicked, bounced, or complained — making segmentation, re-engagement, and list cleanup dramatically faster.
Key Benefits of Filtering Contacts by Email Stats
Targeted Engagement
Build segments from real metrics (Opened/Clicked) to tailor follow-ups and lift conversions.
List Hygiene
Identify Bounced, Complained, or Failed contacts quickly to protect sender reputation.
Flexible Time Windows
Date filters reveal performance within precise campaign or testing periods.
Sending Type Control
Filter by Bulk, Campaign, or Workflow to isolate the source of results.
How To Filter Contacts by Email Statistics
Follow the steps below to ensure your filters return precise results so you can confidently analyze contact-level engagement.
1
Log In to Your Sub-Account
Sign in to the sub-account where you want to analyze contact-level email performance.
2
Open Email Analytics
Navigate to Settings → Email Services → Email Analytics.
3
Review Email Metrics
Review the available Email Metrics at the top of the page:
Note: Email Analytics will only fetch data for Leadconnector
Use the Date Range picker to define your analysis window so metrics reflect the exact period you care about.
5
Choose an Email Source
Click Filters and select Email Source, then pick one of the following sending types:
Campaign — marketing sends dispatched from Campaigns
Workflow — automated emails triggered by a workflow step
Bulk Request — one-off bulk sends to a contact list
6
Select an Email Source Name
Pick the Email Source Name — the specific campaign, workflow, or bulk send you want to analyze.
?
Source Name is required. If you skip this step, no results will return even after selecting an Email Source type.
7
Click a Metric to View Matching Contacts
Click any metric box (e.g., Delivered) to open the contact list that matches that metric for the selected source and date range.
8
Paginate, Adjust & Refresh
Use Pagination (20/50/100 per page), tweak the Date Range, and hit Refresh to re-pull the list whenever you change filters.
9
Drill Into a Contact Record
Click any contact to open the full Contact record for deeper context, notes, or follow-up actions.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Why don't I see results after choosing a Campaign in Filters?
You must also select a Source Name (the specific campaign) and verify that the campaign was actually executed. Without a Source Name, the filter returns no results.
Q: Can I filter multiple campaigns or workflows at once?
You can select all or one source type, but multiple source names within that selected type are supported.
Q: Do opens and clicks require tracking?
Yes. If link tracking or open tracking is disabled, the Opened and Clicked metrics may be incomplete or missing.
Q: What's the difference between Bounced, Failed, and Complained?
Bounced — rejected by the recipient's mail server.
Failed — send error occurred before any delivery attempt.
Complained — recipient marked the email as spam.
Q: Where do I change the date window?
Use the Date Range picker at the top of Email Analytics, then click Refresh to apply the updated window.
Q: Can non-LC providers use contact-level Email Analytics filtering?
No. Contact-level Email Analytics filtering is available only for LC Email sub-accounts.
You can narrow your sub-account list using any combination of these filters:
Filter 1
Provider
Easily filter sub-accounts by specifying the email provider they belong to — LC, Mailgun, or Others.
Filter 2
Domain
Filter sub-accounts by their associated sending domain.
Filter 3
Email Verification
Filter by whether email verification is enabled or disabled for the sub-account.
Provider Coverage
What You Can Do for Each Provider
Different providers expose different bulk actions. Pick the one that matches your sub-accounts.
2
Filtering by LC (SourCherry)
When filtering for sub-accounts on the LC provider, you can:
Filter — show only sub-accounts that are using LC.
Bulk-update domain — change the sending domain for selected sub-accounts.
Toggle email verification — enable or disable verification on the selected sub-accounts.
3
Filtering by Mailgun
When filtering for sub-accounts on Mailgun, you can:
Filter — show only sub-accounts that are using Mailgun.
Switch provider to LC — migrate the selected sub-accounts off Mailgun.
Modify the Mailgun domain — bulk-update the Mailgun domain for the chosen sub-accounts.
4
Filtering by Others (Gmail, SMTP, etc.)
For any sub-accounts that aren't on LC or Mailgun — Gmail integrations, custom SMTP, or any other provider — select Others. From there you can:
Filter — show only sub-accounts using a non-LC, non-Mailgun provider.
Switch provider to LC — migrate these sub-accounts onto LC in bulk.
Why This Helps
This combination of filtering and bulk actions gives agencies more flexibility and customization to manage every sub-account's email service efficiently — without opening each one individually.
5
What the Filter View Looks Like
A preview of the new agency-level sub-account filter and bulk-action panel:
6
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Where do I find the new filter?
It lives at the agency level. Open the agency sub-accounts list and you'll see a new filter panel with Provider, Domain, and Email Verification dropdowns.
Q: Can I combine all three filters at once?
Yes. The filters compose — for example, you can show all Mailgun sub-accounts on a specific domain that have email verification disabled, then act on that exact slice.
Q: What providers does \"Others\" include?
Anything that isn't LC or Mailgun — Gmail, custom SMTP integrations, and any other connected email provider. The agency-level bulk action available for \"Others\" is switching the provider over to LC.
Q: Do the bulk actions affect every sub-account in my filter result?
Only the sub-accounts you explicitly select. The filter narrows the list; you then check the boxes next to the specific sub-accounts you want to update before applying a bulk action.
Q: Will switching a sub-account from Mailgun to LC affect emails already sent or scheduled?
No. The provider change only affects future outgoing emails. Emails already delivered are unaffected, and emails already in flight finish on the previous provider.
Q: Can I undo a bulk action?
There's no one-click undo — you'd need to filter the same sub-accounts again and reapply the original setting. Treat bulk actions as deliberate and double-check your selection before confirming.
Q: Is there an audit trail of who changed what?
Bulk provider, domain, and verification changes are tracked in the agency activity log. Each entry records the agency user who initiated the action, the affected sub-accounts, and the timestamp.
This article will guide you through the A2P Sole Proprietor Brand Registration process for 10DLC messaging. By following this guide, you will understand who qualifies, how to register, the associated fees, and limitations. This ensures your SMS/MMS campaigns stay compliant with carrier regulations and operate smoothly.
Note: Customers with a tax ID are not eligible for Sole Proprietor Brands. They should use a Low Volume Standard Brand instead.
Sole Proprietor registration is ideal for individuals or small businesses in the U.S. and Canada who operate under their own name, have no formal business entity or Tax ID (like an EIN), and only one employee. This registration allows them to send compliant SMS/MMS messages via 10DLC (10-Digit Long Code) channels, ensuring better messaging compliance and deliverability.
Key Benefits of A2P Sole Proprietor Brand Registration
Legally send SMS/MMS through 10dlc-compliant routes.
Build brand trust with better deliverability and fewer message filtering issues.
Avoid heavy carrier penalties for unregistered messaging.
Access basic messaging throughput suitable for low-volume messaging needs.
What are the Requirements for Sole Proprietor Registration?
Sole Proprietor brands are available to individuals or small businesses who meet the following requirements:
No Tax ID: Customers with a tax ID are not eligible for Sole Proprietor Brands; they should use a Low Volume Standard Brand instead.
1 Phone Number per Campaign: Sole Proprietor accounts purchasing multiple local numbers may encounter errors when texting, specifically error code 30034, even with approved numbers. This issue arises because each purchased number needs to be specifically linked to an approved A2P 10DLC campaign.
OTP Verification: Confirm your identity using a One-Time Password (OTP) verification step.
Valid Details: Must include a valid and accurate business name, first name, last name, email address, phone number, and physical address.
US Addresses: Only valid U.S. addresses (including P.O. boxes) are allowed. Addresses in other countries are no longer permitted.
Operate under your legal name: No LLC, Corporation, etc.
Carrier-matching contact details: Mobile number and email must match carrier records for successful verification.
Brand Compliance Checklist (Required for Approval)
Before submitting your A2P Brand Registration, verify the following:
Note: Failure to comply with these standards will result in brand rejection by carriers.
Verify Message Category
Ensure your campaign does not fall under a Forbidden Message Category:
Debt relief, consolidation, and forgiveness programs are prohibited for A2P SMS, even if first-party.
Lead Generation and Marketing used to acquire new leads are not allowed (including bought lists, shared databases, or unclear opt-in practices).
Promotional campaigns for lending and investment brands are disallowed, even if first-party. These brands may only send transactional notifications.
Websites mentioning data sharing with affiliates or third parties will likely be rejected.
Avoid Deceptive Advertising
Your website must NOT include:
False claims about products or services
Missing required disclosures
Misleading information
Hidden terms in small print
Unverified comparative claims
How to Register as a Sole Proprietor Brand?
Follow these steps carefully to complete your Sole Proprietor Brand registration:
Step 1: Navigate to Trust Center
Click on Settings from your sub-account.
Select Phone System under Business Services.
Click on the Trust Center tab.
Step 2: Determine Profile Needs
Note: You can check the brand name at https://opencorporates.com/ to make sure the business name does not have an EIN.
Click on the Start Registration button under A2P Messaging (SMS)tab.
Select UnitedStates or Canada from the \"In which country is your business entity registered?\" dropdown.
Select 'No, the business I'm registering does not have a tax ID' option from the \"Does the business you're registering have a tax ID (Ex. US EIN, Canada BN9, etc)?\" section.
Click on Continue.
Step 3: Add Business Details
Important: Make sure the business name doesn’t include “LLC” or any terms suggesting it’s more than a sole proprietorship.
Enter either the legal name of the organization which is sending the messages, or your own name if this brand is not for an organization.
Click on Continue.
Step 4: Add Business Address
Select your Country.
Select your State/Province/Region. (The address provided here should match the address mentioned in the cp575 form (US Only)
Add Street Address. (Must be a valid address linked to your business. Please don't add a P.O box in the Street Address)
Add your City. (The address provided here should match the address mentioned in the cp575 form (US Only)
Enter your Postal/Zip code. (The address provided here should match the address mentioned in the cp575 form (US Only)
Click on Continue.
Step 5: Add Contact Information of Authorized Representatives
This can be any person that can answer questions about this brand, if needed. Please note that you cannot reuse contact information between brands. Each brand you create must have unique contact information.
Add Authorized Representative's First and LastName.
Add Email Address. (Don't use the same email for more than 5 brands. Privateemaildomains are noteligible for Sole prop Brand registration. Make sure you are using a public domain email (e.g., Gmail (NOT Gsuite), Hotmail, Yahoo, etc)
Add Phone Number. (Don't use the same number for more than 5 brands and number provided should be reachable)
Select your Job Position from the list of designations or select Other and type in your designation.
Click on Continue.
Step 6: Business Use case Acknowledgement
Important: Only one number can be linked to a Sole Prop Campaign. Once approved, your default number will be linked automatically, but you can update it after approval if needed.
The Brand and Campaign type is automatically set to \"Sole Proprietor\" based on the responses provided under Profile Needs.
Check the box to acknowledge the applicable fees and charges, then click Continue to proceed.
Step 7: Add Business Brand Details
Enter either the legal name of the organization which is sending the messages, or your own name if this brand is not for an organization.
Select your Business Industry from the dropdown. If an exact match isn’t available, choose the category that best aligns with your business.
Add a Phone Number. (DO NOT use numbers obtained using SourCherry)
Click on Continue.
Important: Please enter a mobile number that you can receive text messages on to complete OTP verification. Only US/Canadianmobilenumbers are accepted. \n\nDonotuse a number purchasedthroughSourCherry or a VoIPnumber purchased from any platform. You can use the samemobilenumber for upto3SoleProprietorbrandregistrations. This limit is set by the carriers.\n\nThe mobile number is critical in the registration process and is used for sending a One-Time Password (OTP) verification request, which you must respond to with \"Yes\".\n
Step 8: Add Campaign Details
In the Campaign Use Case dropdown, Sole Proprietor will be pre-selected based on previous steps.
In the Use Case Description field, explain what the campaign will be used for.
Use Case Description Tips:
• Explain what messages you'll send, who receives them, and how often.
• Examples are for guidance only copying them may cause rejection.
• Don't forget to list your business name and all DBAs.
Example: This campaign sends appointment information - confirmation and reminder messages - to customers once they have booked an appointment with company_name on the website and opted in to receive promotional and notification SMS from company_name.
Add Sample Message #1 and #2
Use the sample message fields to show the exact types of SMS your campaign will send.
Sample Message #1 (Promotional/Marketing)
Provide a promotional/marketing example that includes:
1. Lead’s name
2. Your name (or staff name)
3. Business name
4. Opt-out language (for example, “Reply STOP to unsubscribe”)
Sample Message #2 (Transactional/Informational)
Provide a transactional/informational example that includes the same required elements above. This message should reflect informational content such as confirmations, reminders, or support updates.
Tip: If your campaign includes both promotional and transactional content, make sure you include one of each using the correct field.
Choose Content Included in Your Messages
Select the options that your messages might include and click on Continue.
The message will include an embedded link.
The messages will include phone numbers.
The messages include age gated content as defined by Carrier and CTA guidelines.
The messages will include content related to direct lending or other loan arrangement.
Step 9: User Consent
To comply with carrier regulations, you’ll need to provide details on how your contacts give consent to receive messages and what your opt-in message looks like. Follow these steps:
Opt-In Method
Choose an Opt-In Method from the options: Website Form, Paper Form, Facebook Lead Form, QRCode, Kiosk,Verbal.
Add Opt-In Form URL: Share a publicly accessible link to the website form where users enter their phone number and opt in to receive messages.
Example opt-In Form:
Add the Opt-in Flow and Confirmation Message
Add your Opt-in flow in the How do Contacts Opt-in to Messages? field.
Example: End users opt in via Website Form by visiting (Form Link) and completing a form that collects their phone number. Users can optionally select a consent checkbox to agree to receive SMS messages.
In the \"Opt-in Message\" field, enter the confirmation message users receive once they’ve opted in.
This message must: Include your business name andthe opt-out keyword like STOP.
Example: You have successfully opted in to receive notifications and promotional SMS from company_name. Reply STOP to unsubscribe.
Privacy Policy URL and Terms & Conditions URL These fields are now required for self-serve campaign registration.
In the \"Privacy Policy URL\" field, enter the publicly accessible link to your business's Privacy Policy page.
In the \"Terms & Conditions URL\" field, enter the publicly accessible link to your Terms & Conditions (or Terms of Service) page.
Both fields appear directly below the \"How do contacts Opt-in\" and \"Opt-in Message\" fields in the registration flow.
If you do not have these URLs, consider registering through the prebuilt chat widget flow, which includes compliant Privacy Policy and Terms & Conditions automatically.
Tip: Your Privacy Policy must include the following paragraph to comply with carrier requirements:\n\"No mobile information will be shared with third parties/affiliates for marketing/promotional purposes. Information sharing to subcontractors in support services, such as customer service is permitted. All other use case categories exclude text messaging originator opt-in data and consent; this information will not be shared with any third parties.\"\n
Business Website Compliance Checklist
Ensure your opt-in form and website meets the following carrier and platform guidelines.
Business Website Best Practices:\n\n1. Use a live, publicly accessible website with no broken links or \"under construction\" pages.\n\n2. Clearly display your business name and maintain consistent branding across your domain, website content, and legal policies.\n\n3. Clearly explain the services or products offered on your website.\n\n4. Provide visible and up-to-date Privacy Policy and Terms & Conditions pages.\n\n5. Ensure your opt-in form is easy to find and easy to understand, with CTIA-compliant language.\n\n6. Collect explicit SMS opt-in consent; consent must be clearly stated and not implied.\n\n7. Ensure sample messages accurately reflect your website content and intended messaging use case.\n\n8. Link social media icons directly to your brand's official pages (not generic platform homepages).\n\n9. Implement age-gating where required (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, or restricted content).\n\n10. Use social media pages or app store listings only as supporting proof if a full website is not available.\n\n11. Clearly display any DBA or alternate business names in the footer, Privacy Policy, or Terms & Conditions (if applicable).\n
Please selectall items in the Website Compliance Checklist to proceed and click ReviewApplication.
Our system will review your application, provide improvementsuggestions, and display a Pass/Fail status. Make sure to addressallflaggeditems and achieve a “Pass” across everysection to maximize your chancesofapproval.
Once done, click on Proceed.
Review your details for the last time and click on SubmitApplication.
Step 10: Persona Verification
After clicking on Submit, users need to complete a third party verification step for successful Sole Proprietor registration.
Note: Persona identity verification in SourCherry is a one-time process per sub-account.
Click on Start Verification from the pop-up.
Click on Begin Verifying.
Select the Country your GovernmentIDisfrom and click on Select.
Choose which photo ID you want to upload from the options: A photo of a government ID is needed to verify your identity. Please use the latest issued ID.
Take a clear photo of the Government ID you chose in the previous step.
Live Selfie Check: You will be prompted to take a live selfie using your computer webcam or smartphone to verify the ID matches your face.
Tips to Successfully Pass Persona Verification
To pass the Persona verification, follow these best practices:
Do not use a VPN during verification.
Verify from the same country/region as your ID document. (Example: If your document is issued in Argentina, you must complete verification while located in Argentina.)
Use a physical, government-issued ID (not a scan, screenshot, digital replica, or paper printout) and capture both the front and back if prompted.
Upload clear images: avoid glare, reflections, shadows, and blur. Make sure all text and your photo are readable.
Using a VPN, verifying from a different location than your ID document, or submitting unclear/incorrect ID images commonly results in verification failure.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I update my Sole Proprietor Brand details after submission?
Minor changes are possible, but major edits may require re-registration.
Q: Can I use a VoIP, Google Voice, or SourCherry number for OTP verification?
No. OTP verification requires a real US or Canadian mobile number that can receive SMS. VoIP, CPaaS, SourCherry, or app-based numbers are not allowed and will cause verification failure.
Q: Can I send promotional marketing messages as a Sole Proprietor?
You can send compliant promotional content only if it’s first-party and properly opted-in. However:
Lead generation campaigns are not allowed
Affiliate/shared list marketing is prohibited
Lending/investment promotional content is restricted
Always ensure your use case matches your website and opt-in flow.
Q: Do I need a website to get approved?
A website is not strictly required, but approval chances are much higher if you have:
A live website
Clear service descriptions
Privacy Policy and Terms pages
A visible opt-in form
Carriers heavily review web presence during approval.
Q: What throughput can I expect as a Sole Proprietor?
Sole Proprietor campaigns are designed for low-volume messaging and have limited throughput compared to Standard Brands. They are not ideal for high-scale marketing.
Q: Will my messages be blocked if I skip registration?
Yes. Unregistered 10DLC traffic may:
Be heavily filtered
Experience delivery failures
Face carrier penalties or surcharges
Registration is mandatory for reliable delivery.
Q: Can I reuse the same email or phone number for multiple Sole Proprietor brands?
There are limits:
Email: Avoid using the same email for more than 5 brands
Mobile number: Can only be used for up to 3 Sole Proprietor registrations
Exceeding these limits may result in automatic rejection.
Q: What if my registration fails?
Review your carrier records for mismatches and correct any errors. Contact Support if necessary.
Q: Are there forbidden message types I should avoid?
Our email composer is equipped with the functionality of CC and BCC capabilities, providing a robust emailing experience. This feature allows users to effectively manage their communication by engaging multiple stakeholders in a single thread while preserving individual confidentiality. As an integral part of our user-friendly solutions, this feature continues to redefine user control in communication, in alignment with our commitment to offering feature-rich email experiences.
Please note:
This feature is available only in the New Message Composer and can be accessed via Labs.
What is the CC and BCC capability in the Email Composer?
The CC (Carbon Copy) and BCC (Blind Carbon Copy) capabilities in the Email Composer enable you to send emails to additional recipients.
The CC function allows you to email additional recipients beyond the primary ones in the 'To' field. When you use the CC function, the email addresses of all recipients (primary and CC'd) are visible to all who receive the message.
On the other hand, the BCC function also allows you to send emails to additional recipients, but in a more private manner. When you use the BCC function, the email addresses of the BCC'd recipients are hidden from all other recipients. This means that people who receive the email will not know that the BCC'd recipients are also receiving it, thus ensuring their privacy.
Usage Cases:
Project Updates: If a team is working on a project and the project manager wants to send an update to the team members and keep higher management or other departments in the loop, they can use the CC function. The team members would be in the 'To' field, and the higher management or other departments would be in the 'CC' field. This ensures that everyone has the same information about the project's progress.
Customer Communication: In customer service situations, the support representative might be communicating directly with a customer (the 'To' field), but they might also CC their manager or another team (like the technical team) if they want to keep them informed or require their input on the conversation.
Confidential Matters: If a manager wants to email a staff member but also wants to inform the HR department without the staff member knowing, they could use BCC. The staff member's email would be in the 'To' field, and the HR department would be in the 'BCC' field. This way, the HR department stays informed about the communication without the staff member knowing.
Mass Email without Revealing Addresses: If a company wants to send out an announcement or newsletter to multiple recipients without each recipient seeing the others' email addresses (for privacy reasons), they could use the BCC field. This way, each recipient receives the email without seeing who else the email was sent to.
Vendor Communication: If a business communicates with various vendors or suppliers and needs to send a similar message to all, they can put the primary vendor in the 'To' field and CC the rest. This way, all vendors know about each other, promoting transparency, but the main communication is addressed to the primary vendor.
How to use the CC and BCC feature?
Accessing the Feature: Open the email composer by clicking the \"New Email\" button or \"Reply\" in an existing email thread.
Locating the Fields: You will see the CC and BCC fields alongside the regular \"To\" field. They are easily accessible and integrated seamlessly within the composer interface.
Adding Recipients: Click on the CC/BCC field to expand it. You can now enter the email addresses of the recipients you wish to CC or BCC. You can select an email address from the dropdown list (which contains all your contact emails) or manually type in a new email address.
Collapsing the Fields: After adding the recipients, click on the CC/BCC field again to collapse it. The added recipients will be saved.
Syncing Changes: The new feature also supports 2-way sync. Any changes to the email recipients (added or removed) in our system will be reflected in Gmail/Outlook and vice versa.
Replying to Emails: You can only do a \"reply all\" to any email with CC or BCC recipients. It's important to note that you cannot remove CC/BCC recipients in the middle of a thread.
FAQs
Q: Will a new contact be created if I add an outside email to the CC/BCC fields?
A: No, a new contact will not be created if you add an outside email to the CC/BCC fields.
Q: What happens if I add an existing contact’s email address in the CC/BCC fields?
A: If you add an existing contact’s email address in the CC/BCC fields, the conversation will only show under the primary contact’s thread (the 'To' recipient) and not under the thread of the CC/BCC contact.
Q: Is the CC/BCC feature available for all email channels?
A: Yes, the CC/BCC feature is compatible with all email channels, including Mailgun, Leadconnector (2 Way Sync) - Gmail and Outlook, SMTP email, Custom Providers, and Custom Conversations Providers.
Q: How can the CC/BCC feature improve my email communications?
A: By using the CC/BCC feature, you can efficiently manage your email communications by involving multiple parties, either openly or confidentially. This offers flexibility and enhances communication by keeping all relevant parties in the loop.
Need to store more than one phone number for a contact? SourCherry makes it easy to manage multiple contact numbers from mobile to work, home, and more. You can also set a primary number and assign labels for better organization.
The Multiple Phone Numbers feature in SourCherry allows users to store up to 11 phone numbers for a single contact. Each number can be labeled (e.g., Mobile, Work, Home), and one can be marked as the primary number. This flexibility is ideal for clients, leads, or vendors who use multiple lines of communication.
Key Benefits of Managing Multiple Phone Numbers
Managing several phone numbers for a contact helps ensure your communication is always effective and well-organized.
Store up to 11 numbers per contact.
Assign meaningful labels to each number for clarity.
Set a primary number to prioritize outgoing communication.
Easily update or remove outdated phone numbers.
Improve accuracy in workflows and automation.
Ideal for sales, support, vendors, or personal contacts.
Managing Multiple Phone Numbers
You can quickly add, label, and manage contact phone numbers directly from the contact record in SourCherry.
Step 1: Navigate to the Contacts tab
In your SourCherry dashboard, navigate to the Contacts tab and click on an existing contact or create a new contact to access the Phone numbers section.
Step 2: Click “+ Add Phone Number”.
Add phone numbers one at a time, with support for up to 11 phone numbers total, and choose a label for each one, such as Mobile, Home, Landline or Work.
Check the Primary box to set the main number for the contact.
Editing or Removing Phone Numbers
Keep your contact records clean and accurate by updating or deleting numbers as needed.
Click the Trash icon to remove a number completely.
Only one number can be marked as Primary at a time.
Use Cases for Multiple Phone Numbers
This feature is especially useful in a variety of real-world business and communication scenarios.
Sales teams can call multiple numbers to reach leads more effectively.
Support teams can ensure they have backup contact options for clients.
Agencies can maintain both personal and professional numbers for each contact.
Vendors and partners often have different departmental numbers (e.g., billing vs. operations).
Emergency readiness for critical clients or services by saving backup numbers.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: What happens if I don’t set a Primary number? The first number listed will automatically be treated as the primary number in outgoing calls or messages.
Q: Can I use the same label for multiple numbers? No, each label can only be used once per contact to maintain clarity.
Q: Can I add international numbers? Yes, just make sure to enter the number with the proper international code (e.g., +44 for the UK).
Q: Is there a way to reorder phone numbers? Numbers are displayed in the order they’re entered. To reorder, remove, and re-add in your desired order.
Q: Can I use these numbers in workflows? Yes! Workflows will always use the Primary number unless otherwise configured.
When you register your A2P Brand with your Business Profile, Phone System will submit your business information to The Campaign Registry for review, determining your eligibility and throughput for your messaging Campaigns. This article summarizes how Brand approval works and our best practices to ensure your Brand is approved.
An A2P Brand represents the legal business entity that is sending application-to-person (A2P) text messages. In the A2P 10DLC ecosystem, carriers require every sender to register a brand in order to verify who is sending messages, establish trust, and protect end users from spam and abuse.
The A2P Brand is evaluated independently from message content and determines the sender’s trust profile, which directly influences message throughput, filtering behavior, and long-term deliverability.
An A2P Brand defines:
The legal business name (as recognized by the IRS)
The business entity type (e.g., LLC, Corporation, Sole Proprietor)
The official identity associated with all registered campaigns
The accountability layer for messaging behavior
How Brand Approval Works
The approval process starts with a primary vetting of your brand completed by The Campaign Registry. As part of the approval process, LC Phone will automatically submit your brand forSecondary Vetting, an additional review process that can lead to increased throughput and messaging limits. Once that vetting is completed, you will receive a Trust Score that determines your long code messaging throughput to US networks and daily message limits to T-Mobile as described inMessage throughput MPS and Trust Scores for A2P 10DLC in the US. For a full walkthrough of the Brand registration process, please see ourA2P 10DLC Onboarding Guide.
How To Maximize Your Trust Score
To ensure your Brand is approved and you receive the most accurate Trust Score, you want to submit your business data properly. Below are some best practices to follow along with some frequently asked questions regarding Brand registration.
Use a valid EIN for US-based companies – not a DUNS number
The provided EIN and Legal Company Name must match business registration sources for private and public for-profit companies. Please ensure:
For Standard A2P 10DLC brand registration, customers with a US presence must use an EIN.
A DUNS number is unacceptable for US companies creating Standard A2P Brand registrations. A DUNS number should only be used in Business Profile creation if you do not want to use US A2P messaging and only want to use Stir/Shaken for Voice.
For Non-Profit and Political Organizations, the EIN has to match the Legal Company Name available in the Tax-Exempt Organizations or Registered Political Organizations list. Learn more inNonprofit and Government Guide to A2P 10DLC Text Messaging.
Enter your Legal Company Name exactly as registered with the IRS
If you’re registering a US entity, please enter the exact Legal Company Name as registered with the IRS, which can be found on the CP 575 EIN Confirmation Letter. An exact match between the Legal Company Name and the EIN as displayed on CP 575 is required for the Brand to be successfully registered. Please do not use the Legal Company Name found on the W-2 or W9 forms, as they may be different from what you have on the CP 575 notice.
If you do not have access to your company's CP 575 notice, then contact your company's accountant or financing office and ask for it. If the CP 575 notice has been misplaced, you may request a 147c letter from the IRS and use the information there for registration.
How to find your EIN (for US companies)
Review your CP 575 / 147c forms for your EIN. You can also contact your company's accountant or financing office and ask for the EIN. The following document shows how the CP-575 looks.
Use a Valid Tax ID for companies based outside of the U.S.
The provided EIN and Legal Company Name have to match registration sources for private and public profit companies. Please ensure:
ALL customers creating a Business Profile must provide a valid Tax ID.
A Tax ID from their country is required for Standard A2P 10DLC brand registration or for customers with an International presence.
For Businesses outside the US /Canada, there may be a requirement for additional vetting to verify their brand successfully.
In such cases, they will no longer be able to register as low-volume standards.
Guidance for companies in Canada
On July 27th, for companies in Canada, we switched to ONLY accepting the Business Number (BN) rather than the Corporation/Incorporation/Registry ID numbers for Canadian Brand Registration.
We will only accept the first 9 numeric digits of the BN (BN-9). Here is an example of the format of a BN where the bolded part is the part we will collect in the Canadian Brand.
Tax/Corporation ID field: 123456789RT0001
As always, please ensure that your legal company name and address are consistent with your business registration and are properly spelled.
Guidance for companies in the rest of the world
European companies should use the VIES VAT number validationlookup to look up their brand information before submission.
Companies in Australia should use their Australian Business Number (ABN) and use the official ABN Lookup toolto look up the information.
Companies in New Zealand should use the New Zealand Business Number (NZBN) and use theofficial NZBN lookup toolto look up the information.
For other countries, please enter the numeric portion of your VAT ID number. If you don't have a VAT ID, please provide your country's primary corporation registration number or tax ID number.
Common customer errors for EIN/Tax ID
It is using an incorrect business name, such as the name of the messaging provider, DBA, or the trade name of the company instead of the official, legally registered name. The Legal Name must not be abbreviated and must appear exactly as it is filed with the IRS (US) or the equivalent tax authority in other countries.
It is entering a number in the EIN or Tax ID field that is invalid for the EIN or home country company ID number.
We provide a DUNS number instead of an EIN for a US-based company.
You are using SSN to register your brand. If you used your SSN to file your taxes, you are a sole proprietor and should await further guidance from LC Phone on registering your brand.
Further recommendations
For US businesses, to ensure you’re providing accurate information, enter your business's EIN into the HIPAA Space lookup website. If your business appears in the results, please fill in your name according to the business listing information.
If you are an ISV-type customer and need to validate and enter information for multiple brands in the US, you could use the subscription-based EIN verification service provided by TINCheck.
For validating a brand’s status as a nonprofit, you can use the Results for Tax Exempt Organization Search from the US IRS.
Newly issued EINs or equivalent tax IDs won’t propagate across the relevant databases' validation systems for a few weeks. So, if your brand registration failed due to tax ID mismatch and you recently registered your business for a tax ID, please share documentation with support to help your brand get verified manually by the third-party vendors. Any such documentation must be from the federal level, not the state level.
Check Your Business Address
For all entity types, a mismatch in one of the following might produce a lower Trust Score:
Address/Street line
City
State
Postal Code/Zip Code
Country
Please Note: Submitting the address of a local branch or any address different from the official registered company address might produce a mismatch with a negative impact on the Trust Score.
Supported Stock Exchanges
For Public Profit companies, the stock ticker symbol and the designated stock exchange must match available sources. Available Stock Ticker values are as follows:
NONE
NASDAQ
NYSE
AMEX
AMX
ASX
B3
BME
BSE
FRA
ICEX
JPX
JSE
KRX
LON
NSE
OMX
SEHK
SGX
SSE
STO
SWX
SZSE
TSX
TWSE
VSE
OTHER
Other Factors
The following factors will impact the Trust Score but cannot be influenced by data submitted:
Company size: For all companies, points are earned for the detected size of the company based on independent sources of employee count and revenue.
Years in operation: All companies earn points for their years in operation and domain age.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q.If you are getting this error \"Maximum 3 tries exhausted, please reach out to the support team for next steps.\", please provide the location ID:
Please send us the CP 575 form for the sub-account. Once that's done, we will send that form along with the Account SID / Brand SID for Brand approval, and they will be able to take care of it.
Note: If you're registering a US entity, please enter the exact legal business name as registered with the EIN, which can be found on the CP 575 EIN Confirmation Letter. An exact match between the legal business name and the EIN as displayed on CP 575 is required for the Brand to be successfully registered. Please do not use the legal business name found on the W-2 or W9 forms as they may be different from what you have on the CP 575 notice. If you've misplaced your CP 575 notice, you may request a 147c letter from the IRS and use the information there for registration.
You will only want to submit the first line of the IRS letter in your brand submission. “ACME LLC” not “ACME LLC Theresa Lopez - Fitzgerald MBR”; this can cause rejections.
E.g., Enter ACME LLC as the business legal name
Important Call out: Is your EIN New?
Because your EIN was given very recently (Date), it will take some time for your business to show up in the global records that The Campaign Registry uses to verify brands. We need to wait atleast 30-90 from the issue date of EIN to retry the registration or we can appeal your verification status for 10$ irrespective of the outcome.Please ensure that you provide the complete PDF document of your EIN. If you provide screenshots or just the first page your appeal will be rejected.
Q. Is an EIN mandatory and what do businesses outside the US use for Standard Brand Registration?
EIN is required and mandatory for A2P standard brand registration for US entities. DUNS will result in an error and puts the brand in an Unverified state preventing customers from proceeding with the next steps. DUNS is not an acceptable format for A2P brand registration. If you are a business outside of the US, then for Standard Registration, you can use your business country Tax ID like BN9 for Canada, Company Number for the UK, Company Number from ASIC(ACN) for AUS, etc]
Q. I received an error stating “We are unable to retrieve your TCR Trust Score.” What does that mean?
During Brand approval, the vetting process is automated; however our vendor Aegis is going through some vetting issues, due to which there is a delay in populating the Secondary Vetting score. If we cannot retrieve your TCR Trust Score during Brand registration, it means that it’s undergoing this review, which can take up to 7 business days. If your Brand is not approved after that time, please contact Support.
Q. I received an error message stating, “Your brand registration failed.” What does that mean?
If you receive any error messages stating your brand registration has failed, please follow the instructions provided to resolve your brand information. Your brand registration information is vetted by TCR, and if the vetting rejects your brand information, you will get this error. Some reasons for failure of registration are:
The business registration number (e.g., EIN or Tax ID) does not match your legal name. You need to update one or both fields to resolve such an error.
The stock symbol or ticker you provided does not match your brand information. You need to update one or both fields to resolve such an error.
The organization could not be verified as a US-registered non-profit organization or government entity. To resolve such an error, you need to update your entity type (a.k.a company type) or provide documents for manual verification of your entity type. For more, see Nonprofit and Government Guide to A2P 10DLC.
Q. I received a low Trust Score; how can I increase the score?
The best way to improve your Trust Score is to ensure you have followed the above best practices, including using a valid EIN and using an accurate Business Address. If you have followed the guidelines and are still seeing a low Trust Score, don't hesitate to get in touch with Support. Please note that a Trust Score is calculated based on your brand footprint.
Q. Another company acquired my company; whose information do I provide?
The guidance is always to provide the same business information you would use for your tax reporting at that given time.
Q. My company’s business information has changed; how can I update my A2P Brand?
Your registered business information must stay accurate and up to date for your Brand. Once your Brand and Business Profile are approved, you cannot make changes to them through the Console or API, so if you need to update any information in your Brand/Business Profile, please contact Support with the necessary changes.
Custom Fields for Opportunities give you the flexibility to tailor your CRM to match your exact sales process. By creating, organizing, and applying custom fields, you can track details that matter most to your business—from sales deadlines and client preferences to budgets and lead sources. These fields also integrate seamlessly with filtering, reporting, and pipeline customization, helping your team focus on the right opportunities.
Custom Fields for Opportunities allow you to add, manage, and organize additional data points in your sales pipeline beyond the default fields provided by SourCherry. This feature ensures your pipeline reflects the unique aspects of your business process.
You can create text, dropdown, date, monetary, and other field types, categorize them into folders, and even hide empty fields for a cleaner view. These fields then become usable in filtering, reporting, and automation to streamline workflows.
Key Benefits of Custom Fields for Opportunities
Custom Fields give you control over how you track and organize opportunities, making your CRM a more powerful tool.
Personalization: Capture information specific to your business, such as budget, preferences, or product details.
Organization: Group fields into folders and reorder them for easier data management.
Efficiency: Use the “hide empty fields” option to keep pipeline views clean and focused.
Better Reporting: Include custom fields in dashboards, widgets, and reports for deeper insights.
Filtering Power: Filter and sort opportunities by custom criteria to quickly prioritize leads.
Automation: Use custom fields in workflows, campaigns, and merge fields to save time.
How to Create and Manage Custom Fields
Creating and managing custom fields ensures your team captures the right details for every opportunity.
Accessing Custom Fields
There are two ways to reach the Custom Fields dashboard in SourCherry. Both methods take you to the same place, so you can choose whichever is more convenient.
Via Settings
From your sub-account dashboard, open the Settings menu and scroll down to select Custom Fields. This will take you directly to the Custom Fields dashboard.
Via Opportunity
Inside the Opportunities section, select any existing opportunity and click Add/Manage Fields. This shortcut redirects you to the same Custom Fields dashboard, making it quick to edit while reviewing an opportunity.
Creating New Custom Field
Creating custom fields allows you to capture details unique to your sales process directly within opportunities. From client budgets to follow-up dates, these fields give you the flexibility to customize your pipeline and ensure important information is always tracked.
Add Field
Click the + Add Field button at the top right of the Custom Fields dashboard. This begins the process of creating a new custom field for opportunities or other objects.
Choose Field Type
Select from various field types to match your data needs. Options include text inputs (single line, multi-line, list), values (number, phone, monetary), choices (dropdowns, radio, checkbox), date/time (date picker), and other inputs like file upload or signature.
Field Type
Example Use Case
Single Line
Enter the project name or client company name.
Multi Line
Add detailed notes about client requirements.
Text Box List
Track multiple product SKUs associated with an opportunity.
Number
Record a probability score for conversion (e.g., 80%).
Phone
Save an alternate decision-maker’s phone number.
Monetary
Store the client’s budget or estimated deal value.
Dropdown (Single)
Select the sales stage (e.g., Negotiation, Closing).
Dropdown (Multiple)
Mark all products/services a client is interested in.
Radio Select
Capture yes/no style responses like “Is Budget Approved?”.
Checkbox
Flag if contracts or compliance documents are required.
Date Picker
Track key dates like follow-up or projected close date.
File Upload
Attach proposal files or client RFP documents.
Signature
Collect signed approvals directly within the opportunity.
After selecting the appropriate field type, click Next to continue setting up the custom field.
Assign to Opportunity
After naming your field, set the Object to Opportunity so the field applies specifically within opportunity records. Once all details are filled in, click Save to create the new custom field.
Other Fields
Name: The display label for the custom field (e.g., “Client Budget”).
Group: Folder or category to organize the field under (e.g., “Budget Details”).
Placeholder: A hint text shown inside the field when it’s empty (e.g., “Enter estimated value”).
Additional Preferences: Advanced options for certain field types (e.g., default values, required toggle).
Click the Save button to finalize your new custom opportunity field. Once saved, the field becomes available for use across opportunity records in your pipeline.
Tip: If you mistakenly assign the field to Contact instead of Opportunity, it will only appear in contact records and won’t show in your pipeline opportunities.
Creating a Folder
Folders make it easy to organize multiple custom fields into logical groups. By creating folders, you can keep related fields together, reduce clutter, and make it simpler for your team to find and update the right information inside opportunities.
Add Folder
Click the Add Folder button at the top right of the Custom Fields dashboard. Folders help you organize related fields, making them easier to manage and locate.
Name the Folder
Enter a descriptive name for your folder (e.g., “Budget Details” or “Product Info”). A clear name ensures your team knows exactly what type of fields belong inside.
Select Object
Choose Opportunity as the object so the folder applies specifically to opportunity records. This ensures all fields created under this folder appear in opportunities rather than contacts or other objects.
Click Save after finalizing the folder name and object.
Managing Custom Fields
Once your custom fields and folders are created, you can manage them effectively by reordering, filtering, grouping, or deleting. These tools help keep your opportunities organized and make it easier to find the right information.
Filter by Object
Use the dropdown at the top right to filter custom fields by object type (e.g., Opportunity, Contact, Company). Selecting Opportunity ensures you only see fields linked to opportunities, making it easier to focus on what’s relevant for pipeline tracking.
Group by Folder
Use the Group By dropdown to organize custom fields by folder or category. This makes it easier to view fields based on context—for example, grouping all budget-related fields under “Opportunity Details” or all client inputs under a specific form.
Bulk Actions
Select multiple custom fields using the checkbox menu and use the Bulk Actions menu to edit, delete, or move them into a different folder. This saves time when managing several fields at once instead of adjusting them individually.
Reorder Fields
Use the drag-and-drop hamburger icon to move custom fields up or down in the list. This allows you to control the order in which fields appear when creating or editing an opportunity.
Using Custom Fields in Opportunities Dashboard
Custom Fields are more than just data. they integrate into filtering, reporting, and pipeline views to make sales management easier.
Open Advanced Filters
In the Opportunities view, click Advanced Filters to start applying custom filters to your pipeline. This opens the filtering panel where you can refine results using both standard fields and your custom opportunity fields.
Filter by Custom Fields
Inside the filtering panel, scroll down to the Opportunities Custom Fields section. This area displays all the opportunity custom fields you’ve created, both existing and newly added so you can filter records based on the data that matters most to your pipeline.
Tip: Combine multiple custom field filters to build precise views, such as identifying high-value leads that also meet specific qualification criteria.
Display Custom Fields on Opportunity Cards
Custom fields don’t just live inside the opportunity record, you can also make them visible on the pipeline cards. This ensures important details are available at a glance, helping your team work faster without opening each opportunity.
Open Manage Fields
In the Opportunities view, click the Manage Fields button at the top right. This opens the customization panel, where you can adjust which details appear on opportunity cards.
For adding custom fields, simply scroll down to the Add Fields section.
Add Custom Fields to Cards
Expand the Opportunity Details section under Add Fieldsand check the custom fields you want to add. These fields will now appear directly on the card, giving you quick visibility into information like budgets, task types, or client preferences.
Once you’ve selected the custom fields you want, click the Apply button at the bottom of the panel. Your opportunity cards will instantly update to reflect the new field selections.
Hide Empty Fields
Inside any opportunity card, you’ll see the option to Hide Empty Fields at the top. Enabling this keeps your view clean by showing only fields with values, so you can focus on the information that actually matters.
This is especially helpful if you use many custom fields but only need to review the ones actively filled out for each opportunity.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: If I add or remove custom fields from the Opportunity card using the “Manage Fields” option, will this change apply to all users in the account?
No. Changes made in the Manage Fields panel apply only to your personal view of opportunity cards. Other users in the same sub-account will still see their own customized layouts unless they make adjustments themselves. This allows each user to display the fields most relevant to their role.
Q: What happens to existing data if I delete an opportunity custom field?
Deleting a custom field permanently removes the field and any data stored in it from all opportunities. This action cannot be undone. If you only want to hide a field without losing data, consider moving it into a folder or using the “Hide Empty Fields” option instead of deleting.
Q: Can all custom field types be used for filtering opportunities?
No. While most opportunity custom fields (such as dropdowns, numbers, dates, and text fields) can be used in filtering, certain field types like File Upload and Signature cannot be filtered. These fields still appear in opportunity records but won’t be available in the Advanced Filters panel.
Q: How can I use opportunity custom fields in automations or workflows?
Opportunity custom fields can be used as triggers, conditions, or actions in workflows. For example, you could:
Update a custom field automatically (e.g., increase “Likelihood of Conversion” based on lead activity).
Send personalized messages using merge fields that pull in opportunity custom field data.
Create rules that move opportunities to a new stage when a custom field meets specific criteria.
This integration ensures your custom data isn’t just stored—it actively drives automation in your pipeline.
",
"media": {
"images": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054373293/original/1GqOozmZr8R05rcBS02bYcwmABW5_Kvg-g.png?1758625175",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054373315/original/GbQRrMA_9OgqCGYdKxEYDxnrdnGKI_MFTQ.png?1758625198",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054374744/original/bS4xfntd-FcxoDXa0dTIyuGnQaFO1W7cJg.png?1758625895",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054375370/original/ZNUH2N7b69MRRigSqT6DyeW4Th65JVT_6Q.png?1758626138",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054376449/original/j9cabOyyj4J9ACZ1y84ZRvvPHq5ZpQhTFQ.png?1758626669",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379864/original/AW0ZEWgSObj4Qqb_E_jpxhiK2fEfGyts1Q.png?1758628162",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379921/original/LIt6RXEU7td8gNh9nD3aIBA72x15pLz5pw.png?1758628189",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379944/original/WAQBiC9X50g1rf85uERvXNw4SQKH5ykh0A.png?1758628211",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054382831/original/mzo5MU_Qeyfhb1GhjAbeM-bpV-sZwRQl0w.png?1758629521",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054383098/original/oJQwAGj8bvRdQfQ9kCSxC2ENRgcMt0GgCQ.png?1758629674",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054383273/original/-z9GcnpsgtJtCXrGEjrSEXLq2UuRXytvGQ.png?1758629760",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054386664/original/m3QCoTo4lY8TTgO-6-4OyUOjZrGMXdKWKg.png?1758631008",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054386717/original/3iXwCA98Td7yCvpET2QOGedWZuO55nO_ow.png?1758631026",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054389290/original/fwI06PtRXIIDKl8fHgZFCkUuHc5cAalezA.png?1758631844",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054393221/original/hbw0Ucm9KDvZwByBGaa-djBtGnYpkkJUfQ.png?1758633641",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054394452/original/PoC7GGDak7xaSdGLx5TE-tJjSV59aE1SDw.png?1758634022"
],
"gifs": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379234/original/sU7SMNt7svHQQqdv0ccR0OSsu8UQBpz6Qg.gif?1758627952"
],
"videos": [
"https://www.youtube.com/embed/Ti7BYY47ntM?&wmode=opaque"
]
},
"internalLinks": [],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": true,
"hasGif": true,
"screenshotsNeedReview": true
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:22:19.114Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000000550",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000550-why-sms-in-mexico-may-appear-from-a-different-number",
"title": "Why SMS in Mexico May Appear from a Different Number",
"originalTitle": "Why SMS in Mexico May Appear from a Different Number",
"slug": "why-sms-in-mexico-may-appear-from-a-different-number",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Overview
When sending SMS in Mexico, recipients may sometimes see a different number than the one listed in your Phone Numbers tab. This is not a system error but rather a result of local carrier regulations and anti-spam policies. Understanding these rules is essential to avoid confusion and ensure compliance.
Mobile carriers in Mexico have strict regulations on SMS sender IDs.
Messages sent from long codes (regular phone numbers) may have their sender ID overwritten or replaced with a random or generic number, particularly for application-to-person (A2P) traffic.
AT&T Mexico is somewhat unique—it sometimes allows person-to-person (P2P) SMS from regular numbers, but this is not guaranteed across all scenarios or volumes.
2. Message Volume and Sender ID Changes
There is no official regulation stating “nine texts in two minutes,” but this reflects carrier anti-spam logic.
If a phone number sends high volumes of SMS in a short time, carriers may:
Reclassify the traffic as A2P.
Automatically rewrite the sender ID.
In some cases, block the messages altogether.
These measures are in place to comply with local spam and regulatory requirements.
3. Why Recipients See a Different Number
If you send SMS from a regular number and exceed allowed patterns or volume, the carrier may override your sender ID.
This results in recipients seeing a different number or a generic sender ID, even though you sent it from your configured number.
4. Default Sender ID Registration
If you have a registered Sender ID in Mexico, Twilio will use it consistently.
If you do not, the default carrier behavior applies, which may include sender ID changes.
Suggested Solution
To ensure consistent SMS delivery in Mexico:
Register a Sender ID approved for Mexico.
Or, use a short code or another compliant messaging channel designed for A2P traffic.
These options guarantee that messages display a consistent sender ID and comply fully with local carrier rules.
Final Note
If your recipients in Mexico are seeing a different number than expected, it is due to carrier enforcement—not a misconfiguration in your account or Twilio. This behavior is beyond your direct control unless you register an official Sender ID or adopt a supported A2P channel.
A step-by-step guide to adding the 5 required DNS records in Siteground to authenticate your dedicated sending domain.
What You'll Learn
This guide walks you through configuring a dedicated sending domain for SourCherry Email inside Siteground's DNS Zone Editor. You'll add two TXT records, two MX records, and one CNAME record — five records in total.
Before you start, decide whether you'll use your main domain (e.g. companyname.com) or a subdomain (e.g. replies.companyname.com). If your main domain is already used with Google Workspace or another mail provider, you must use a subdomain.
If your domain is companyname.com, you can set up either the main domain or a subdomain.
Main domain — if you add the main domain, it must not be used with Google Workspace or any other email provider at the same time.
Subdomain — type anything before your root domain, e.g. replies.companyname.com or support.companyname.com. This is the recommended option if you already use your root domain for email.
Heads Up
If you use Google Workspace (Gmail) for your main domain's incoming email, you must use a subdomain here — otherwise your Google Workspace MX records will conflict with the Mailgun MX records you're about to add.
Step 3
Click Add & Verify
Enter your domain or subdomain name and click Add & Verify.
The next screen will display the 5 DNS records you need to add. Keep this screen open — you'll reference it throughout the following steps.
Leave this DNS records screen open — you'll copy values from it in the steps below.
2
1st TXT Record (SPF)
Log in to Siteground and go to Site Tools → Domain → DNS Zone Editor.
Domain > DNS Zone Editor\" src=\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030769548/original/VsNojWfnrB6J31RPe6Kf-eYmW7DBngqqlQ.jpg?1723215298\" style=\"max-width: 100%; border: 1px solid rgb(226, 232, 240); border-radius: 8px;\" class=\"fr-fic fr-dii\">
In the Create New Record section:
A
Click the TXT tab
B — Name
Different for everyone — do NOT include the root domain
Enter only the subdomain portion of your domain:
Setting up lc.companyname.com → Name: lc
Setting up replies.companyname.com → Name: replies
Setting up the main domain (companyname.com) → Name: @ or leave empty
C — Value
Same for everyone
Paste the following value exactly as shown:
v=spf1 include:mailgun.org ~all
D
Click Create
3
2nd TXT Record (DKIM)
Click + Add Record again to open a new Create New Record form.
A
Click the TXT tab
B — Name
Different for everyone — do NOT include the root domain
Head back to the platform's DNS records screen and copy the hostname for the 2nd TXT record. Copy everything up to (but not including) your root domain. The key is to exclude companyname.com from whatever you paste.
Note
Everyone's 2nd TXT record hostname and value is unique to their account. Copy the exact values shown on your DNS records screen.
Examples — copy only the highlighted portion:
Scenario
Hostname to enter in Siteground
Example screenshot
Subdomain (e.g. helpdesk.companyname.com)
mx._domainkey.helpdesk
Main domain (companyname.com)
mailo._domainkey
C — Value
Unique — copy from the platform's DNS records screen
Go back to the platform and copy the value shown for the 2nd TXT record (highlighted below). Paste it into the Value field in Siteground.
D
Click Create
4
1st MX Record (mxa.mailgun.org)
Click + Add Record to open a new form. This time, click the MX tab and select Add your own MX records.
A — Name
Different for everyone
Use the same logic as the TXT records above:
lc.companyname.com → Name: lc
replies.companyname.com → Name: replies
Main domain (companyname.com) → Name: @
B — Priority
Same for everyone: 10
C — Destination
Same for everyone
Paste the following destination:
mxa.mailgun.org
D
Click Create
5
2nd MX Record (mxb.mailgun.org)
Click + Add Record again. The 2nd MX record is identical to the 1st except the destination changes to mxb.
A — Name
Different for everyone — same logic as the 1st MX record
lc.companyname.com → Name: lc
replies.companyname.com → Name: replies
Main domain → Name: @
B — Priority
Same for everyone: 10
C — Destination
Same for everyone
mxb.mailgun.org
D
Click Create
6
CNAME Record
Click + Add Record one final time.
A
Click the CNAME tab
B — Name
Different for everyone — do NOT copy the root domain
Go back to the platform and copy the CNAME hostname. Exclude the root domain portion.
lc.companyname.com → Name: email.lc
replies.companyname.com → Name: email.replies
Main domain (companyname.com) → Name: email
C — Resolves To
Same for everyone
mailgun.org
D
Click Create
All 5 records have been added — now head back to the platform to verify.
Now that all 5 DNS records are in place, go back to the platform and click Verify DNS Settings.
Heads Up
If some records still show a red ✗ after verifying, click Verify Domain again. DNS changes can take up to 24–48 hours to propagate fully, though they often appear within minutes on Siteground.
Q: Do I need a dedicated sending domain, or can I use the shared domain?
You can use the shared SourCherry domain to send emails without any DNS setup. However, a dedicated sending domain improves deliverability and brand trust because emails appear to come from your own domain rather than a shared one. It also gives you full control over your sending reputation.
Q: Can I use my main domain (e.g. companyname.com) if I also use Google Workspace for company email?
No — you cannot use the same domain for both Google Workspace (or any other mail provider) and the Mailgun MX records required for LC Email. If your main domain already has Google Workspace MX records, use a subdomain (e.g. replies.companyname.com) instead.
Q: How long does DNS propagation take after adding the records in Siteground?
Siteground DNS changes often propagate within a few minutes for records managed within their system. However, full global propagation can take up to 24–48 hours in some cases. If verification fails immediately after adding the records, wait 15–30 minutes and click Verify Domain again.
Q: Why do I need two MX records (mxa and mxb)?
The two MX records (mxa.mailgun.org and mxb.mailgun.org) provide redundancy for Mailgun's inbound email routing. If one server is unavailable, email is automatically routed through the other. Both records use the same priority of 10.
Q: Some of my DNS records show a red ✗ even after waiting. What should I do?
Double-check that you did not include the root domain in any of the Name/Hostname fields. For example, if your domain is replies.companyname.com, the name for the TXT and MX records should be replies only — not replies.companyname.com. Also confirm that the 2nd TXT value was copied exactly from the platform without any extra spaces.
Q: Can I use any subdomain name, or does it have to be something specific?
You can use any subdomain prefix you like — common choices are replies, mail, lc, send, or support. The subdomain name itself does not affect deliverability. Pick something that makes sense for your workflow.
Q: Will my contacts notice any difference after switching to a dedicated sending domain?
Contacts will see emails appearing to come from your own domain (e.g. noreply@replies.companyname.com) instead of a shared SourCherry domain. This can improve open rates and trust. The sending experience from your side within the platform does not change.
Q: Do I need to repeat this process for each sub-account?
Yes — dedicated sending domains are configured per sub-account. If multiple sub-accounts need dedicated domains, you can use different subdomains for each (e.g. team1.companyname.com and team2.companyname.com), or the same subdomain on separate sub-accounts if needed.
Analyze your imported contact list for email deliverability risks and reduce bounce rates using Bulk Verification technology.
Overview
The Risk Assessment feature is designed to optimize your email marketing campaigns. Harnessing the power of Bulk Verification, it analyzes your imported contact list and offers detailed insights into deliverability and risk levels.
Elevate your email strategy by minimizing bounce rates, reducing unnecessary sending blocks, and improving the overall deliverability of your campaigns.
Please Note
For LC Email Users: The bulk email verification feature is exclusively available to LC Email users.
For the Agency: This feature is designed for agency use and applies to locations within the LC Email system.
The Risk Assessment feature is an invaluable tool for email marketing. It scrutinizes your imported contact list and provides a comprehensive overview of email deliverability and potential risks.
It uses internal Bulk Verification technology to analyze the email list, dividing addresses into categories such as deliverable, undeliverable, catch-all, and unknown. It further segments these by risk level: high, medium, low, and unknown — giving you a granular picture of your contact list's deliverability prospects.
Beyond surfacing data, it enhances your email strategy by helping reduce bounce rates and unnecessary blocks on your sending capabilities. It also prompts enabling the email verification feature for those not yet using it.
In short, this feature is your strategic partner in optimizing the deliverability and effectiveness of your email marketing campaigns — helping you reach your audience more consistently and efficiently.
2
Risk Categories
Each email address in your imported list is assigned one of the following risk categories based on its deliverability assessment:
Risk Category
Description
High
Email addresses in this category are highly likely to be undeliverable. This could be because the email account is non-existent, the domain has no MX records, or the recipient's mailbox is full.
Medium
Email addresses in this category may or may not be deliverable. This could be because the server responded ambiguously, the domain was identified as a catch-all, or the address was generated randomly.
Low
Email addresses in this category are likely to be deliverable. The server responded positively to the verification request, and the address appears properly structured and associated with a legitimate domain.
Unknown
Email addresses in this category could not be verified due to unforeseen errors or temporary issues with the recipient's email server. Deliverability remains uncertain unless re-verified later.
3
Usage Cases
Bulk email verification is a powerful tool for businesses and organizations of all sizes. Here are the most common scenarios where it delivers value:
Use Case 1
Email Marketing Campaigns
Sending newsletters or promotions to unverified lists leads to high bounce rates and damages sender reputation. Bulk verification cleans your list so you reliably reach your intended audience.
Use Case 2
User Registration Verification
Users often make typos, use non-existent addresses, or provide fake emails during sign-up. Bulk verification validates these before they enter your database, ensuring you can communicate effectively with your users.
Use Case 3
CRM Data Cleaning
CRM records grow stale as people change jobs, email addresses, or abandon old accounts. Regularly verifying in bulk keeps your CRM data current and actionable.
Use Case 4
E-commerce Platforms
Online retailers depend on transactional emails (order confirmations, shipping updates) and marketing emails reaching customers. Verification ensures these critical communications land in inboxes.
Use Case 5
Community Updates
Non-profit organizations, clubs, and communities that send regular member updates use bulk verification to ensure information reaches all intended recipients without bouncing.
Use Case 6
Education Institutes
Universities, colleges, and schools communicating fee updates, event announcements, or educational materials must ensure these reach valid addresses — especially when communications are time-sensitive.
Use Case 7
Research and Surveys
Researchers and companies distributing surveys via email need valid addresses to collect accurate and reliable responses. Verification prevents wasted sends and skewed data.
Use Case 8
Job Portals and Recruitment Companies
Recruitment platforms sending job notifications, interview schedules, and updates to job seekers and employers rely on bulk verification to maintain effective and reliable communication.
4
How to Use This Feature
Upon importing a CSV to the CRM, if your sub-account is on the LC Email SMTP and you have not yet enabled the individual Email Verification feature, the imported CSV will be analyzed automatically in the background.
A popup will appear and an email will be sent to sub-account team members with the risk analysis of that import's email addresses. Both the popup and the email encourage users to enable Email Verification.
Example Email
Body of the Email That Will Be Sent (Example Data)
Subject: Email content for list of high risk
Hi [sub-account Friendly Business Name],
We scanned your latest Contact Import and found the following with the email addresses:
Deliverable: 71.84%
High Risk: 17.81%
Activating native email verification can eliminate potential risks by ensuring that you don't send to non-valid email addresses. Once activated, the system will not attempt to send to any email address marked as invalid.
Support article link: [support article link here]
If you have any further questions or need assistance managing your email list, please feel free to contact our support team using the blue check mark in-app. We are here to help!
Best regards,
[Agency Admin Name]
[Agency Company Name]
Tip
Enabling native email verification as prompted will prevent the system from attempting to send to any address flagged as invalid — protecting your sender reputation proactively.
5
Risk Assessment Tab
The Risk Assessment tab at Settings → Email Services → Risk Assessment keeps a historical record of all imports and their email address risk assessments.
Settings → Email Services → Risk Assessment
Here's a breakdown of each field in the interface:
Records
Shows how many bulk email verification records or jobs are currently displayed.
Date Range
The date range at the top indicates the time frame for the verification records shown.
Import Name
Lists the name of each verification job, fetched from the Bulk Import action in Bulk Actions. Each name should be unique to help you identify and track individual jobs.
Created At
The exact date and time each job was created, formatted as \"Day Month Date Year Time Zone.\"
No. of Emails
The total number of email addresses included in the job for verification.
Deliverable (%)
The percentage of email addresses in the job verified and found to be deliverable or valid.
Undeliverable (%)
The percentage of email addresses verified and found to be undeliverable or invalid.
Unknown (%)
The percentage of email addresses that could not be conclusively verified — their deliverability status remains unknown.
Pagination
If more records exist than fit on a single page, use the pagination controls at the bottom to navigate between pages.
6
FAQs
Q: What does the Deliverable percentage in the Risk Assessment tab mean?
The Deliverable percentage indicates the proportion of email addresses verified and found valid and reachable. It is calculated by dividing the number of deliverable addresses by the total in the job, then multiplying by 100.
Q: How is the Undeliverable percentage calculated?
The Undeliverable percentage represents the proportion of addresses found invalid or unreachable. It is determined by dividing the number of undeliverable addresses by the total in the job, then multiplying by 100.
Q: What does the Unknown percentage signify?
The Unknown percentage shows the proportion of addresses that could not be definitively verified — their deliverability status is unclear. Calculated by dividing the number of unknown emails by the total in the job, then multiplying by 100.
Q: What is the \"Import Name\" in the Risk Assessment tab?
The \"Import Name\" is a unique identifier for each batch of email addresses submitted for verification. It lets you track and manage each verification job separately.
Q: Why might the date and time in the \"Created At\" column be important?
The timestamp helps you understand when each job was initiated, which is useful for tracking progress over time or determining the order in which jobs were processed.
Q: Why isn't every email verified?
Not all email addresses can be verified due to server restrictions, privacy settings, or network issues. These are categorized as \"Unknown.\"
Q: What happens if the email server doesn't respond in time?
If the server doesn't respond in a timely manner, the verification system categorizes the address as \"Unknown.\" Deliverability could not be determined in that instance.
Q: What should I do if I see many \"Unknown\" email addresses in my list?
Many \"Unknown\" results may indicate server issues or technical problems. Consider re-running the verification at a later time. If the issue persists, contact Support — email address formatting or CSV format issues could also be contributing.
Q: What should be the next step after getting the Risk Assessment report?
Consider removing or re-checking \"Undeliverable\" and \"Unknown\" email addresses before running any campaign. This improves your deliverability rate and overall campaign effectiveness.
Q: What does \"No. of Emails\" mean in the Risk Assessment tab?
It represents the total count of email addresses included in a particular batch for verification, giving you an idea of the scale of each job.
Q: Why do different jobs have different Deliverable, Undeliverable, and Unknown percentages?
Percentages vary based on the quality of addresses in each batch. A batch with older or outdated emails will typically have a higher Undeliverable percentage than one with recently collected addresses.
Q: What can I do to improve my Deliverable percentage?
Collect email addresses from reliable sources, update your lists regularly, and use double opt-in methods to ensure addresses belong to people genuinely interested in receiving your communications.
Q: Why are some emails marked Deliverable but still bounce?
Deliverable emails can still bounce due to a full recipient mailbox, a temporarily unavailable mail server, or the email being marked as spam by the recipient's email service.
Q: Can I re-run email verification for a specific batch?
Yes. Re-running is particularly helpful when a significant percentage of emails were marked Unknown, which may have been caused by temporary server issues at the time of the original run.
Q: How often should I verify my email lists?
Verification frequency depends on factors like list growth and bounce rates. As a best practice, verify your list before any significant email campaign.
Q: How does email verification impact my overall email marketing strategy?
Email verification is crucial for a healthy email marketing strategy. It helps remove invalid or undeliverable emails, improving deliverability rates, protecting sender reputation, and increasing campaign effectiveness.
Q: Does the verification process respect user privacy?
Yes. The verification process does not access the contents of any email — it only checks whether an address is valid and capable of receiving emails.
Q: Is the email verification process secure?
Yes. Data submitted for verification is processed over secure connections and handled according to the service provider's data handling and privacy policies.
",
"media": {
"images": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031509099/original/vzPwf3ZKSHgnOLALFrGJ9Brchc7OrY_Vgg.jpg?1724335549"
],
"gifs": [],
"videos": [
"https://www.youtube.com/embed/sGVAzWD0bUQ?wmode=opaque",
"https://youtu.be/PPOjAKKAuZ8",
"https://youtu.be/uGPWGV8uTmc",
"https://youtu.be/Lqr1UHQ_siU?si=s-SkA7pNrvjH8X9T",
"https://youtu.be/Lqr1UHQ_siU",
"https://youtu.be/NdUf2_PInRU",
"https://youtu.be/w_3xVNpX3-Q"
]
},
"internalLinks": [],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": true,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": true
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:22:25.892Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000000581",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000581-how-to-link-your-privacy-policy-when-collecting-personal-data",
"title": "How to Link Your Privacy Policy When Collecting Personal Data",
"originalTitle": "How to Link Your Privacy Policy When Collecting Personal Data",
"slug": "how-to-link-your-privacy-policy-when-collecting-personal-data",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
A privacy policy explains how your business collects, uses, and protects personal information—like names, phone numbers, or emails. It’s not just good practice—it’s often legally required under laws like GDPR, CCPA, and A2P 10DLC carrier regulations. SourCherry gives you multiple ways to link your privacy policy wherever you're collecting data from users.
Disclaimer : This is not legal advice. This help article is for informational purposes only. Always consult with your own legal counsel.
Please consult your legal counsel for help in drafting and finalizing your privacy policy specific to your business and use case.
Where to Add Your Privacy Policy Link
Each data-collection area in SourCherry offers a place to link your privacy policy. Follow the steps below for each feature.
Funnels & Websites
Text Element: Drag in a Text field, type your message (e.g., “By submitting, you agree to our Privacy Policy”), highlight “Privacy Policy,” click Link, and paste your URL
Forms
Text Element: Drag in a Text field, type your message (e.g., “By submitting, you agree to our Privacy Policy”), highlight “Privacy Policy,” click Link, and paste your URL
Terms & Conditions Element: Drag in the T & C element, select Edit Link, then paste your policy URL and customize the text
Surveys
Text Element: Drag in a Text field, type your message (e.g., “By submitting, you agree to our Privacy Policy”), highlight “Privacy Policy,” click Link, and paste your URL
Calendars
Text Element: Text / Link on the page that the calendar is embedded on
Terms & Conditions Element: Use a custom form with a T&C element that includes the link (Note: you will need to link to a page on your website which contains your T&C as reference.)
Order Forms
Text Element: Text / Link on the order page
Advanced Settings: Enable Terms and Conditions in Advanced settings of Order Form and create a link there
Web Chat
Link: Link URL in Text in the widget description
Ecommerce Store Checkout
You can add policy links to the mandatory consent checkbox on your Store Checkout page.
Go to Sites → Stores. Open the store and edit the Checkout page.
Select the Checkout element.
Scroll to Terms and Conditions in the right panel. Turn on Enable Terms and Conditions.
Customize the consent text and add your policy links.
How to Create a Privacy Policy Page
Before you can link to your policy, you’ll need a standalone page (either inside SourCherry or externally hosted). Here's how to do it:
Go to Sites > Funnels or Websites
Create a new funnel/website or open an existing one
",
"media": {
"images": [],
"gifs": [],
"videos": []
},
"internalLinks": [
"155000004670",
"155000001633",
"155000001032"
],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": false,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": false
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:22:28.060Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000000582",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000582-how-to-get-customer-consent-or-track-legal-basis-to-process-your-lead-s-or-customer-s-personal-data",
"title": "How to get customer consent or track legal basis to process your lead's or customer's personal data",
"originalTitle": "How to get customer consent or track legal basis to process your lead's or customer's personal data",
"slug": "how-to-get-customer-consent-or-track-legal-basis-to-process-your-lead-s-or-custo",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Disclaimer : This is not legal advice. This help article is for informational purposes only. Always consult with your own legal counsel.
What is personal data?
Any information which are related to an identified or identifiable natural person
Where can personal data be collected?
Funnels & Websites
Pre-requisites
Privacy policy should be displayed during obtaining the personal data
Get your customer's consent to process their personal data or make sure you have a legal basis for doing so.
How to get consent from your customers
Forms & Forms embedded on websites or funnels
Surveys & Surveys embedded on websites or funnels
Webchat
Calendars & calendars embedded in funnels or websites
Order forms embedded in funnels or websites
How can you track your \"legal basis\" for processing customer's personal data if they have not expressly consented to the processing
Create a tag for it and apply it to such contacts (where it applies) either manually or by means of an automation
\n \n\n\n
",
"media": {
"images": [],
"gifs": [],
"videos": []
},
"internalLinks": [],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": false,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": false
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:22:53.167Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000000583",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000583-how-to-delete-contacts-and-their-data",
"title": "How To Delete Contacts and Their Data",
"originalTitle": "How To Delete Contacts and Their Data",
"slug": "how-to-delete-contacts-and-their-data",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
This article provides a step-by-step guide to deleting contacts and their associated data in SourCherry. It explains how the feature works, its implications, and best practices for maintaining data hygiene and troubleshooting common issues. Whether you’re removing outdated contacts or fulfilling regulatory data requests, this guide covers all you need to know.
Only Admins can delete contacts to ensure data security and prevent accidental deletion.
Deleted contacts can be restored within two months i.e. 60 days.
Associated data, such as conversations, notes, and tasks, may also be deleted (based on system settings).
Best Practices
Double-Check Before Deletion: Ensure you have selected the correct contacts to avoid accidental data loss.
Backup Important Data: Export contacts to a CSV file before deletion for record-keeping.
Regular Maintenance: Review and clean your contact list periodically to maintain data hygiene.
Assign Permissions Wisely: Restrict deletion capabilities to Admins or trusted team members only.
BEFORE DELETING A CONTACT: Once a contact is deleted, all associated data such as conversations, notes, tasks, and activity history is permanently lost. Restoring a deleted contact will not recover this associated data. Please ensure to back up any important information before proceeding with deletion.
Double-Check Before Deletion: Ensure you have selected the correct contacts to avoid accidental data loss.
Backup Important Data: Export contacts to a CSV file before deletion for record-keeping.
Manual Deletion of Contacts
Step 1: Open Contacts Page
Navigate to the Contacts section in your SourCherry dashboard.
Step 2: Select Contacts
There are two different ways to select contacts. You can either select all contacts on a page (or all contacts in your CRM) by clicking the checkbox in the header of the contacts list, or you can select individual contacts by clicking the checkbox next to their name.
Select one or more contacts by checking the boxes next to their names.
Step 3: Delete Contacts
Click the Delete button at the top of the contact list.
If you’re using a Smart List view and don’t see the trashcan (Delete) icon, make sure you’ve selected one or more contacts first. The delete icon will only appear after selection. If it still doesn’t show, you may not have the required admin permissions. Contact your account administrator to confirm.
Step 5: Confirm Deletion
Confirm the deletion by typing DELETE in the confirmation text box.
BEFORE DELETING A CONTACT: Once a contact is deleted, all associated data such as conversations, notes, tasks, and activity history is permanently lost. Restoring a deleted contact will not recover this associated data. Please ensure to back up any important information before proceeding with deletion.
Double-Check Before Deletion: Ensure you have selected the correct contacts to avoid accidental data loss.
Backup Important Data: Export contacts to a CSV file before deletion for record-keeping.
Monitor the deletion status on the Bulk Actions page.
Restoring Deleted Contacts
If you accidentally deleted a contact, deleted contacts can be restored within two months (60 days).
IMPORTANT:Restoring a deleted contact WILL NOT restore the associated data for that contact, which would include conversations, notes, and task. Please ensure to back up any important information before proceeding with deletion.
Navigate to Contacts > Restore.
Select the contact(s) to restore.
Click Restore to bring the contact back into the active list.
Confirm the selection to Restore the deleted Contacts.
Automating Contact Deletion Using Workflows
SourCherry allows the automated deletion of contacts using workflows. This is useful for removing unsubscribed, inactive, or invalid contacts.
Go to Automations > Workflows and create a new workflow.
Include the Delete Contact action in the workflow to automate the removal process.
Configure triggers, such as \"Contact Tag\" or you could create a new tag for these contacts (e.g., \"Unsubscribed\").
Test and activate the workflow.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Does deleting a contact remove them from all campaigns? Yes, deleted contacts are removed from all campaigns, workflows, and lists.
Q: Will deleting contacts affect my reports? Deleting contacts may impact historical campaign metrics or email deliverability statistics.
Q: Can I delete multiple contacts at once?
Yes, you can bulk delete contacts by selecting multiple entries in the contact list.
Q: How do I ensure only Admins can delete contacts? Review and update user roles and permissions in the Settings > My Staff section.
Q: Why Can’t I Delete a Contact?
You may not have Admin permissions. Contact your account administrator for access.
The contact may be part of an active campaign or workflow. Remove them from the campaign or workflow before attempting deletion.
Q: What Happens to Associated Data?
Associated data, such as notes, conversations, and tasks, will also be deleted unless specified otherwise. Review the Bulk Actions page for detailed status.
Q: Can I Recover Deleted Contacts?
Yes, within two months. Beyond that period, the data is permanently removed.
To delete a prospect from the prospecting tool, please head into your 'Agency View' > Click on 'Prospecting' > Search for the prospect you wish to 'delete' > Complete prompts (This step is irreversible)
\n \n\n\n
",
"media": {
"images": [],
"gifs": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155006077655/original/txxKpO4AIP8bsJ_xJXsOskAt7ryjm5LQKQ.gif?1692999222"
],
"videos": []
},
"internalLinks": [],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": false,
"hasGif": true,
"screenshotsNeedReview": false
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:22:58.939Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000000624",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000624-how-to-customize-post-for-each-socials-",
"title": "How to Customize post for each socials?",
"originalTitle": "How to Customize post for each socials?",
"slug": "how-to-customize-post-for-each-socials",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Revolutionize social media marketing with our new 'Customize for Each Post' feature. Tailor your content for different platforms, effortlessly overcoming character limitations and image/video format barriers, and manage diverse campaigns all in one place. Experience unparalleled flexibility in crafting unique messages for each social network with a simple toggle.
The \"Customize for Each Post\" feature is an innovative tool that allows marketers, businesses, and individuals to create and manage tailored content for different social media channels, all within one interface. Here's a thorough understanding of what the feature entails:
Multi-Platform Compatibility: This feature enables users to select multiple social media platforms (such as Facebook, LinkedIn etc.) and customize the content according to the specific character limitations and requirements of each platform.
Content Customization: Recognizing the disparities in character limits among various social media channels, this feature allows for individualized content crafting. Whether you want a short message for LinkedIn or an extended post for Facebook, you can create both within the same interface.
Toggle Switch: A simple toggle switch allows users to switch between customized content for different channels and standardized content that applies across all selected platforms. This ensures flexibility in content creation and delivery.
AI Integration: The integration with Content AI means users can leverage artificial intelligence to generate content up to 900 words, adapting it to different content sizes (small, medium, and large) based on the type of social media being used.
Scheduling Capability: Not only can you create customized posts, but you can also schedule them for a later time, automating your social media management process.
Cost-Effective and Time-Efficient: This feature minimizes the effort needed to create separate posts for different platforms, saving time and resources and ensuring a cohesive yet customized marketing approach.
How to use this feature?
Navigate to the Marketing Section:
Select the \"Marketing\" tab from the sidebar menu.
Click on the \"Social Planner\" option.
Click on New Post:
Click on the \"Create New Post\" button.
Choose to Customize for Each Channel:
To get the customization option to appear, you need to select multiple social media channels, such as Facebook, Instagram, LinkedIn, GMB (Google My Business), etc.
Once you've selected the social media channels you want to post on, you'll see an option to \"toggle on\" the customization for each channel.
Customize for each Channel
By toggling this on, you can create unique content for each platform, considering their individual character limitations and media formats like images/videos.
Craft Your Custom Content:
Write your content for each channel, making sure to adhere to the specific character limits for each platform (e.g., 5,000 for Facebook, 1,500 for GMB, etc.).
Character Limits of Various Social Media Channels
Here's a table that indicates the character limits for different social media channels, an essential factor in using the \"Customize for Each Post\" feature:
Channel
Character limit
Facebook pages & groups
5,000
Instagram profiles
2,200
LinkedIn pages & profiles
3,000
GMB (Google My Business)
1,500
You can view and edit the content for different channels separately, ensuring that each post aligns with the platform's character limit and audience preferences.
You can add images, videos, or other multimedia elements to enhance your post if applicable for each social media.
Note:
If media is still uploading, switching social accounts can discard the in-progress upload.
If media is still uploading, switching the Customize for Each Post toggle can remove the in-progress upload.
If a video thumbnail is processing, switching the social account or the Customize for Each Post toggle can interrupt thumbnail processing. You may need to reapply the thumbnail.
Leverage Content AI (Optional):
If you want to utilize AI for content creation, you can do so at this stage to generate new words or adapt the content size based on the type of social media.
Schedule or Post Immediately:
Once you've crafted the content for each channel, you can post it immediately or schedule it later.
Confirm and review all details to ensure accuracy and consistency across platforms.
Please Note:
If you turn off the customization toggle, the active social content will apply to all the social channels selected, and there will be a warning that customized content will be lost.
By following these steps, you can utilize the \"Customize for Each Post\" feature to create personalized and platform-specific content for different social media channels, maximizing your reach and engagement. It's an efficient way to manage diverse campaigns and tailor messages to resonate with each platform's unique audience.
FAQs
Q: What if my content exceeds the character limit for a specific platform?
A: You will need to modify the content to fit within the character limit for each platform. The feature typically provides warnings or indicators if content exceeds the allowed character count.
\n \n\n\n
",
"media": {
"images": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176260/original/DyIootGhs_Fe0VM2ODyR-LvWk8jgZx6ktQ.png?1692034961",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176564/original/1yhYsF-j8LZBLpCRIiC3DFx8gY6ZUJXcUg.png?1692035255",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176611/original/uD1WdXkMBcdAAioCchZ9KI4iXPrdpzvs_g.png?1692035350",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048869856/original/ptDSqDDA0-lugx9llLeqsJPma_8UINGDRw.png?1750863431",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155064535966/original/1Wy6TXP3j0O6X3fe3gZXfd-e_5_oMXRVhA.png?1770691284",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176906/original/Hc6I1UBbhapeFzgazVj1Cfl0zRTe5p6WFA.png?1692035608",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176960/original/5IbS881B_zhWOcA6jL9yt2K-K-aHE71Sxw.png?1692035717",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048870075/original/_y71MZip2uZ8eWJwiiyGt4iy3jv8be7M4g.png?1750863597",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048870095/original/6mW5SrJoH7NcON2qG_e4_d7NXVMXkPuPVw.png?1750863612",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005177049/original/4YnRYABTyjSflTUNTFwCTIhQ7l7fOgp7GA.png?1692035835",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005177080/original/Ap_qV0C47UudDnSGpOCti216VeTFlQtsBA.png?1692035892",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005177120/original/-2ntwlxNMYpzQZYt2ekAmKg8YdNiz6tViQ.png?1692035967"
],
"gifs": [],
"videos": [
"https://www.loom.com/embed/6418824c52564179b0656ac5a49d3a2b?sid=245bb0d6-04c2-40b4-9cbc-dde11bf97a5f"
]
},
"internalLinks": [
"48001210585"
],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": true,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": true
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:23:01.059Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000000648",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000000648-how-to-post-recurring-social-posts-through-the-social-planner-",
"title": "How to post Recurring Social Posts through the Social Planner?",
"originalTitle": "How to post Recurring Social Posts through the Social Planner?",
"slug": "how-to-post-recurring-social-posts-through-the-social-planner",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Recurring posts provide a streamlined way to create evergreen content across various social platforms, scheduled daily, weekly, monthly, or yearly. Through a simple process, users can generate quality content using AI, schedule it with flexible time settings, and even edit parent and child posts. Take control of your content strategy by utilizing this feature, but be mindful of platforms like Twitter, which may flag repetitive content.
The recurring posts feature in the Social Planner is designed to help users maintain consistent and automated social media engagement by scheduling evergreen content regularly. Here's a detailed breakdown of how it works:
Flexible Scheduling: Users can set the posts to repeat every day, week, month, or year. They can select specific days of the week, date ranges, and post times according to their preferences.
Content Creation: Users can generate quality content using AI, allowing them to create posts that resonate with their audience quickly.
Editing Options: The feature allows for edits to both parent and child posts. If changes are made to the parent post, they will be replicated in all child (scheduled) posts. Editing a child's post will not impact the parent's post.
Recurring Posts Tab: The parent post is added to the Recurring Posts tab once scheduled. Users can access the edit function to change all recurring posts' time and date ranges.
Scheduled Posts: Individual scheduled posts appear separately, and users can edit each as needed without affecting the others.
Platform Consideration: It's important to be mindful of the policies of specific social platforms. For example, Twitter may flag content as repetitive if the recurring post feature is used excessively.
Long-term Strategy: This feature allows for creating long-term content strategies, helping businesses stay in front of their audience without manually posting content regularly.
Images and Media: Along with the text, users can add images or other media from their library or, through image AI, visually enrich the content.
Monitoring and Management: Users can track and manage all their recurring posts through a simple interface, providing control over their social media content.
Where can we utilise this?
Promoting Seasonal Offers: A retail store can set recurring posts to promote seasonal sales, offers, or specific products at the beginning of each season. They can easily plan this for the entire year and forget the manual posting process.
Daily Inspirational Quotes: A motivational speaker or life coach can schedule daily inspirational quotes to engage their audience and reinforce their brand messaging. This consistency helps in keeping the audience connected and engaged.
Weekly Tips or Tutorials: A tech company or educational platform can set up weekly tutorials or tips to share with their followers. This regular content provides value and helps establish the company as an expert.
Celebrating Recurring Events: A company can acknowledge and celebrate recurring events like employee birthdays, anniversaries, or national holidays, ensuring that these posts are never missed and adding a personal touch to the company's social media presence.
Monthly Product Showcases: A manufacturer or distributor can showcase different products every month, providing information, features, and benefits to educate potential customers.
Content Repurposing: For businesses with a rich content library (such as blogs or podcasts), recurring posts can periodically share or reshare this content to new followers or those who might have missed it the first time.
Reinforcing Brand Campaigns: If a company has a year-long brand campaign or slogan, recurring posts can consistently remind followers of the brand's core message, ensuring that it stays fresh in their minds.
Reminder for Regular Events: For organizations hosting regular events like webinars or community meet-ups, recurring posts can act as reminders, ensuring participants have the information they need to join.
Celebrating Historical Milestones: Museums, historical societies, or educational institutions can use this feature to share historical facts or milestones on the corresponding dates, providing educational content to their followers.
How to use the Recurring Post feature?
Go to Marketing > Social Planner.
Click on New post -> 'Create New post'.
Select the social account(s) for your recurring post. If you have not connected any social accounts yet, you can still set up the recurring schedule, and Social Planner prompts you to connect before you save or schedule.
Create New Post with Recurring Schedule
Day - The user must choose the date and time of posting on repeat everyday.
Week - Users will have to choose day of the week when they would like to repeat schedule between the date range and post time.
Month - The user will have to choose the date and time of posting on repeat once in a month.
Year -The user will have to choose the date and time of posting on repeat once in the year.
Once the recurring post is scheduled, the parent post will be added in Content > Recurring Posts tab
Click on 'edit' to change the time and date range.
Important Pointers
Inside the 'Content' tab view-
Parent post entry is visible and can be edited from here.
Edit -> It will update all entries of the iteration with the selected date and time range.
Delete -> Deletes all parent entries of recurring posts
Inside the 'Calendar' view-
All individual posts are visible and can be edited from here.
Edit -> It will update all entries of the iteration with the selected date and time range.
Delete-> Deletes the individual recurring post
Inside the 'List' view-
Immediate active scheduled post (to be published next) is visible and can be edited from here.
Edit -> It will update all entries of the iteration with the selected date and time range.
Delete-> Deletes the individual recurring post
System sanctity practices
Review Regularly: Please review and update recurring posts regularly to ensure relevance, especially if there have been changes to products, offers, or brand messaging.
Compliance with Platform Policies: Different social media platforms have different policies regarding recurring and automated posts. Please be aware of and comply with each platform's guidelines to avoid potential issues.
Time Zone Considerations: If targeting a global audience, please consider scheduling posts according to the different time zones of your target demographics to maximize reach.
Content Backup: Please ensure a backup of all recurring content. Any technical issues could lead to loss of content, and having a backup will prevent unnecessary work in recreating it.
Monitoring Performance: Please note that analyzing the performance of recurring posts helps understand what resonates with the audience. Regularly monitoring insights can guide future content strategy.
Sensitive Issues and Crisis Management: Please be cautious with recurring posts during sensitive times or crises. Scheduled posts that may be inappropriate during unexpected events must be reviewed and managed accordingly.
Integration with Other Campaigns: If ongoing or planned marketing campaigns exist, please ensure that the recurring posts align with the overall marketing and branding strategies.
Legal and Ethical Considerations: Please be mindful of intellectual property rights, permissions, and other legal considerations when using images, quotes, or other content within recurring posts.
Experiment and Iterate: Recurring posts are a tool, and like any tool, they require experimentation to find the most effective way to use them. Please don't be afraid to try different strategies and iterate based on what you learn.
FAQs
Q: Can I set recurring posts for specific holidays or annual events?
A: Yes, you can schedule recurring posts for specific dates, allowing you to automate posts for holidays or annual events like company anniversaries.
Q: What happens if I edit the parent post of a recurring schedule?
A: Editing the parent post will replicate the changes in child scheduled posts. However, changes made to individual child posts will not affect the parent post.
Q: Can I mix media types, like images and videos, in my recurring posts?
A: Yes, you can include various media types, such as images, videos, or GIFs, within the recurring posts to make them more engaging.
Q: How does the recurring post feature interact with different time zones?
A: You'll need to set the time for your recurring posts considering the time zone of your target audience. Be mindful of global audiences if applicable.
Q: Is there a limit to how far in advance I can schedule recurring posts?
A: Depending on the specific settings and platform guidelines, you may be able to schedule recurring posts for days, weeks, months, or even years in advance.
Q: Can I pause or temporarily stop a recurring post series?
A: You cannot pause or temporarily stop a recurring post series
Q: What if I want different recurring posts for different social platforms?
A: You can create unique recurring posts tailored to each social platform using the Customize Each Post functionality, allowing you to align the content with each network's specific character limits and guidelines.
Q: Can recurring posts be part of a larger campaign with non-recurring content?
A: Absolutely! You can integrate recurring posts with other marketing strategies and campaigns to create a cohesive and consistent brand message.
Q: How can I ensure my recurring posts are accessible to all users, including those with disabilities?
A: Incorporating accessibility features like captions, alt text, and other inclusive practices can make your recurring posts accessible to a broader audience.
Q: How do I avoid making recurring posts feel too automated or impersonal?
A: Mixing recurring posts with real-time, personalized content and engaging with your audience can help maintain a human touch in your social media presence.
Managing opportunities efficiently is essential for maintaining an organized and effective sales pipeline. The Opportunity Changed workflow trigger in SourCherry automates actions whenever an opportunity record is updated, ensuring real-time responsiveness to changes. Unlike the Opportunity Status Changed trigger, which only tracks status updates, this trigger provides broader functionality by detecting modifications such as lead value adjustments, stage movements, reassignments, and custom field updates. This guide will walk you through its benefits, configuration, and best practices to help you streamline your CRM automation.
The \"Opportunity Changed\" workflow trigger in SourCherry automates actions when any changes occur in an opportunity record. Unlike \"Opportunity Status Changed,\" which only tracks status updates, this trigger can respond to broader modifications such as updates to lead value, pipeline stage, assignment, or custom fields. This flexibility enables businesses to streamline workflows and maintain real-time accuracy in their CRM.
Key Benefits of Opportunity Changed Workflow Trigger
Comprehensive Tracking: Automate actions based on any change in an opportunity, not just status updates.
Real-Time Notifications: Notify team members immediately when an opportunity is updated.
Enhanced CRM Accuracy: Ensure automated record-keeping and data consistency.
Improved Sales Pipeline Management: Trigger follow-ups or task assignments when opportunities are modified.
Customizable Automation: Apply workflow filters to tailor automation for specific opportunity changes.
Flexible Filter Operators: Event-Based Operators: Use “Has Changed,” “Has Changed To,” and “Equals” operators to trigger workflows only when specific opportunity fields are updated.
Backward Compatibility
Existing Opportunity Changed workflows continue using their current behavior unless manually updated.
No existing workflows are affected by the new operators or date field support.
Configuring the Opportunity Changed Trigger
Setting up this trigger allows businesses to automate workflow actions based on updates to opportunities in the CRM. Follow these steps:
Step 1: Access the Workflows Builder
Log in to your SourCherry account, navigate to Automations > Workflows, and either create a new workflow or open an existing one.
Step 2: Add the \"Opportunity Changed\" Trigger
Click + Add New Trigger, then search for Opportunity Changed in the list of available triggers. Once found, select it to proceed with the configuration.
Step 3: Naming the Trigger
Give your trigger a clear and descriptive name that reflects its purpose. A well-named trigger makes it easier to identify workflows, especially when managing multiple automations within the system.
Step 4: Applying Filters
Filters help fine-tune your workflow so it only triggers when specific changes happen to an opportunity.
Assigned To Filter
The Assigned To filter triggers the workflow when an opportunity is reassigned to a different team member. This is particularly useful for sales and support teams that manage leads collaboratively. By using this filter, businesses can automate follow-up actions when ownership of an opportunity changes, ensuring a smooth handoff between team members.
Available operators:
• Has Changed: Triggers when the assigned user changes to any other user.
• Has Changed To: Triggers only when the opportunity is assigned to a specific user you select.
• Equals: Triggers when any change occurs on opportunities currently assigned to a specific user
For example, if a high-value lead is reassigned to a senior sales representative, the workflow can automatically notify the new owner, update internal records, or trigger a follow-up sequence. This helps maintain accountability and ensures that opportunities are not overlooked during the transition.
Tag filter (formerly “Has Tag”)
Use Tag filters to control when Opportunity Changed should fire based on opportunity tags.
The Tag filter allows you to trigger a workflow based on tags assigned to an opportunity. This filter ensures that automation is only activated when an opportunity contains a specific tag, providing more control over workflow execution.
For example, if a tag like “Hot Lead” or “Follow-Up Needed” is applied to an opportunity, the workflow can be configured to send automated follow-up emails, notify sales reps, or move the lead to a different pipeline stage. This is especially useful for segmenting leads, prioritizing high-value opportunities, and triggering specific actions based on lead categorization.
In Pipeline Filter
The In Pipeline filter triggers the workflow when an opportunity undergoes a change within a specific pipeline. This ensures that automation is only activated for opportunities that belong to the selected pipeline, allowing for more targeted workflow execution.
Available operators:
• Has Changed: Triggers when the opportunity moves to any different pipeline.
• Has Changed To: Triggers only when the opportunity moves to a specific pipeline
you select.
• Equals: Triggers when any change occurs on opportunities within a specific pipeline.
For instance, if a lead moves within the Sales Pipeline, but not the Customer Support Pipeline, the workflow can be configured to trigger only for the sales-related changes. This is particularly useful for businesses with multiple pipelines handling different processes, such as sales, onboarding, and client retention. By applying this filter, teams can ensure that workflows are executed within the appropriate context, reducing unnecessary automation triggers and improving workflow efficiency.
Lead Value Filter
The Lead Value Change filter triggers a workflow when the monetary value of an opportunity increases or decreases. This allows businesses to automate actions based on changes in potential revenue, ensuring that important updates do not go unnoticed.
For example, if a lead’s value is increased—perhaps due to an upsell or a revised quote—the workflow can notify the sales team, adjust pipeline stages, or send a custom follow-up email. Conversely, if the lead value decreases, the system can alert the account manager for review or trigger retention strategies to prevent loss.
Lost Reason Filter
The Lost Reason filter allows businesses to automate workflows when an opportunity is marked as Lost and a reason is assigned. This filter helps track and respond to lost deals strategically, enabling businesses to improve their sales approach and customer retention efforts.
To refine how this filter works, users can choose between the following filter operators:
Has Changed: • Equals: Triggers when an opportunity currently contains the selected lost reason value.
Has Changed To: Triggers the workflow only when the lost reason is updated to a specific value. For example, if the lost reason is changed to “Price Too High”, the system can send an automated follow-up email with a discount offer.
Equals: Triggers when any change occurs on opportunities that have a specific lost
reason assigned.
Status Filter
The Status filter allows workflows to trigger based on the current status of an opportunity. This ensures that actions are executed when an opportunity reaches a specific stage in the pipeline, helping teams track and manage their sales progress more efficiently.
The available filter operators for refining this filter include:
Is: Triggers the workflow when an opportunity matches the selected status. For example, if “Won” is selected, the workflow will activate only when an opportunity is marked as Won.
Is Not: Triggers the workflow when an opportunity does not match the selected status. This can be useful when filtering out certain statuses from triggering workflows, such as ignoring “Abandoned” opportunities.
Has Changed: Triggers when the status changes to any other status.
Has Changed To: Triggers only when the status changes to a specific value you
select.
After selecting an operator, users can choose from the available status options in the dropdown.
Checkbox Fields ( Opportunity Custom Field Filters )
Filter opportunities based on checkbox custom field changes.
• Added: Triggers when specific checkbox options are added/checked.
• Removed: Triggers when specific checkbox options are removed/unchecked.
• Equals: Triggers when any change occurs on opportunities where the checkbox
equals specific values.
Radio Select Fields ( Opportunity Custom Field Filters )
Filter opportunities based on radio select custom field changes.
• Has Changed: Triggers when the radio select value changes to any other option.
• Has Changed To: Triggers only when the radio select changes to a specific value
you select.
• Equals: Triggers when any change occurs on opportunities where the radio select
equals a specific value .
Dropdown Fields (Single & Multiple in Opportunity Custom Field Filters)
Filter opportunities based on dropdown custom field changes. Works the same for both
single-select and multi-select dropdowns.
• Has Changed: Triggers when the dropdown value changes.
• Has Changed To: Triggers only when the dropdown changes to specific values you
select.
• Equals: Triggers when any change occurs on opportunities where the dropdown
equals specific values.
Date Fields ( Opportunity Custom Field Filters )
Date custom fields are now fully supported inside the Opportunity Changed trigger.
• Has Changed: Triggers when the date field value changes.
• Has Changed To: Triggers only when the date field changes to a specific date you
select.
• Equals: Triggers when any change occurs on opportunities where the date field
equals a specific date.
Step 4: Set Up Workflow Actions
Once the trigger is set up, define the actions such as:
Send Email or SMS Notification: Notify sales reps about opportunity updates.
Assign a Task: Automatically create a follow-up task in the CRM.
Update Contact Record: Modify customer details based on opportunity changes.
Trigger Another Workflow: Link this trigger with other workflows for advanced automation.
Step 5: Save, Test, and Publish
Click Save Trigger to finalize settings.
Run a test to ensure the workflow functions correctly.
Once verified, click Publish to activate the automation.
Example Use Cases
Trigger a workflow only when an opportunity status changes to “Won”
Notify a team member when opportunity ownership changes
Start onboarding when a custom install date is added
Trigger follow-up automation when a checkbox field is checked
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How is this different from the \"Opportunity Status Changed\" trigger?
The \"Opportunity Changed\" trigger tracks any change within an opportunity, including assignment, lead value, pipeline, and custom fields. \"Opportunity Status Changed\" only activates when an opportunity’s status (e.g., Open, Won, Lost) is modified.
Q: Can I set multiple filters for a single workflow?
Yes! You can combine multiple filters, such as tracking only high-value leads that are reassigned to a senior sales rep.
Q: How do I test if my workflow is working correctly?
After setting up the trigger, manually update an opportunity and check if the workflow executes the expected actions. Review workflow logs to troubleshoot any issues.
Q: Does this trigger work with opportunity custom fields?
Yes! You can configure the trigger to activate when specific custom fields are updated within an opportunity record.
Q: What is the difference between \"Has Changed,\" \"Has Changed To,\" and \"Equals\"
operators?
\"Has Changed\" triggers when that particular field value changes to anything. \"Has Changed To\" triggers
only when a field changes to a specific value you select. \"Equals\" triggers when any change
happens to an opportunity that currently has that specific field value.
Q: Can I use date custom fields as filters now?
Yes! Date custom fields are now available as filters in the Opportunity Changed trigger. You
can use \"Has Changed,\" \"Has Changed To,\" or \"Equals\" operators to trigger workflows
based on date field changes.
Q: Will my existing Opportunity Changed workflows break?
No. Existing workflows continue using their current behavior unless manually updated.
Easily streamline your email creation process by inserting pre-saved text snippets into any email editor—whether you’re building templates or launching campaigns. This feature boosts efficiency, ensures consistency, and makes campaign creation faster than ever.
Text Snippets allow you to quickly insert reusable blocks of text (and, in campaigns, attachments) into your emails. By saving commonly used content as snippets, you can maintain brand consistency, reduce repetitive work, and speed up the email creation process across templates and campaigns.
Key Benefits of Text Snippets
Using text snippets in your email workflows offers several advantages:
Save time by reusing content: No need to rewrite or copy-paste frequently used sections.
Ensure consistency across emails: Standardize messaging, disclaimers, or promotional sections.
Simplify campaign creation: Quickly assemble emails with ready-to-go sections.
Automatic attachment inclusion in campaigns: Attachments saved with snippets are automatically added when used in campaigns.
Reduce errors: Minimize manual entry mistakes by using pre-approved content.
How To Setup Text Snippets
Setting up and using text snippets is straightforward and helps you create emails more efficiently. Proper setup ensures your team can access and insert the right content whenever needed.
Access the Snippets Section
Open the left-hand navigation menu and click on Marketing > Snippets to begin creating or managing text snippets in your account. This is where all saved snippets are stored and accessible for reuse.
Create a New Text Snippet
In the Snippets panel, click on + Add Snippet to launch the snippet creation window. Enter the Name, Body, and optionally attach files or test the message by phone. The preview pane on the right lets you see how the message will appear on a mobile device.
Name and Preview Your Snippet
Enter the desired text and, if applicable, add attachments (attachments will only be included in campaigns).
Save your snippet for future use. Provide a descriptive title for your snippet, ideally based on the question or use case it addresses (e.g., “What services do you offer?”). The mobile preview helps ensure the text looks clear and personalized before saving.
Customize Your Snippet with Dynamic Content
Use Custom Values and Trigger Links to personalize messages. The live preview shows exactly how the message will appear to the contact. Use this view to refine the tone, clarity, and formatting.
Test and Save
You can also enter your mobile number and click Send Test to test your snippet. Once you're good with your snippet, Click Save.
Please Note: Please take note of the number of characters, number of segments and approximate cost of your snippet when sent as an SMS message.
Insert Snippet in Conversations
When responding to contacts in the Conversations tab, click on the Snippets icon, search for the relevant snippet, and click to insert it directly into your message. This saves time and ensures consistency.
SMS Preview with Custom Snippet
Here’s an example of a fully composed SMS message using a saved snippet. You can see how dynamic placeholders are replaced with actual contact information to personalize each message sent through your campaigns or manual outreach.
Managing Your Saved Snippets
Keep your snippet library organized for efficient email building. You can easily edit, delete, or rename existing snippets by navigating to the Snippets section in your account. Keeping content updated ensures your team always uses the latest approved messaging.
Insert Snippet Using Automation (Workflows)
Snippets can also be inserted into automated messages inside workflows. This allows you to maintain consistent messaging while saving time, since commonly used text blocks don’t need to be retyped each time you build an automation.
-Workflows.\">Navigate to Automation > Workflows.
Open an existing workflow or create a new one.
Add an Action
Add a messaging action such as Send SMS or Send Email. In the message composer, click on the Templates option to view a dropdown of all snippets.
Select the Snippet
Choose the snippet you’d like to insert. The text will appear directly inside the message body. Save your workflow action.
How Attachments Work with Snippets
Understanding when attachments are included with snippets helps avoid confusion during email creation.
Email Templates: Attachments linked to snippets will not be included when inserted into templates. Only the text content will appear.
Campaign Emails: Attachments will be automatically included when you insert a snippet in a campaign email. This makes it easy to consistently deliver resources like PDFs, brochures, or product guides.
Workflows: Attachments included in snippets are not automatically added when used in workflow emails or SMS. To include files in automated emails, you must attach them directly within the workflow step.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I use text snippets in both email templates and campaigns?
Yes, text snippets can be inserted into both email templates and campaigns.
Q: Can I organize snippets into folders or categories?
Yes, you can organize snippets into folders.
Q: Are there limits to the number of snippets I can save?
There are currently no published limits, but best practice is to keep your snippet library organized for ease of use.
Q: Who can create or edit snippets in my account?
Snippet creation and editing permissions depend on your account’s user roles and settings.
Q: Can I add images or formatted content to snippets?
Yes, snippets can include formatted text and images, making them versatile for various content needs.
Q: Will using snippets affect email deliverability?
No, using snippets does not impact deliverability, but ensure your content follows best practices for email compliance.
Q: Can I use snippets in all workflow actions? Snippets can be inserted into any workflow action that includes a message editor, such as Send SMS or Send Email. They are not available in non-messaging actions like Wait steps or If/Else conditions.
Q: Do snippets with attachments work inside workflows? No. Attachments included in a snippet are not automatically added when used in workflow messages. To include a file, upload it directly in the workflow email step.
Use SourCherry WordPress staging to safely test updates before impacting your live site. This guide covers creating a staging site, switching between environments, recognizing staging indicators, and publishing changes to live.
Note: Ensure WordPress Hosting subscription is activated for the location/sub-account.\n
In the world of web development, a staging environment serves as a critical component of the development and testing process. It's essentially a clone or replica of your live website, hosted on a separate server or directory, designed to facilitate a variety of tasks crucial to web development and maintenance. Staging provides a safe, separate copy of your WordPress site for testing and development without affecting your live website. It allows you to try plugins, themes, and content changes in an isolated environment, then publish approved updates to your live site when ready.
Key Elements of Staging Environments:
Replication: Staging environments replicate your live website, including all its files, databases, and configurations. This replication ensures that you're working with a precise copy of your website.
Isolation: The staging environment operates independently of your live site. This isolation is vital because it allows you to experiment with changes, test new features, or troubleshoot issues without affecting your live website's performance or functionality.
Testing Ground: Staging environments are essentially a safe and controlled testing ground. They allow you to make changes, install new plugins, update themes, or modify content in a risk-free environment. This process helps you identify and resolve issues before implementing changes on your live site.
Key Benefits of Staging Environment Access
Risk Mitigation: Web development often involves significant changes that could potentially disrupt your live site. Staging environments allow you to mitigate risks by thoroughly testing these changes before they go live.
Enhanced Workflow: Staging environments streamline your development workflow. They provide a dedicated space for testing and refining updates, ensuring that only polished and error-free changes make it to your live site.
Collaboration: For teams of developers, designers, and content creators, staging environments offer an efficient platform for collaborative work. Multiple team members can work on different aspects of the website simultaneously without interfering with one another's progress.
Quality Assurance: Staging environments are invaluable for quality assurance. They help you catch and rectify issues related to design, functionality, or content before your audience encounters them on the live site.
Feature Availability by Environment
Available in Both Live & Staging:
Plugins
Themes
Users
WordPress Debugging
Server Settings (phpMyAdmin, PHP version)
WordPress Management (Auto-updates, SEO indexing)
Available in Live Only:
Domain Management
Production Analytics
Cancel Subscription
Available in Staging Only:
Dedicated staging URL and admin access
Disabled areas clearly marked as staging-only
Users added in an isolated environment with messaging during publish
How To Set Up and Use Staging Environment in SourCherry WordPress
Following these steps ensures your staging site is prepared correctly and that you publish only when ready. Publishing pushes all staging changes to live and cannot be undone.
Log into your sub‑account.
Go to Sites > WordPress.
Click on the Manage Website button for the site you want to activate staging Environment for.
Click + Create Environment. Preparation may take some time.
Once complete, you’ll see the staging URL, staging admin access (to access the staging site and make changes), and related details. You can make all the necessary changes to your site and test it before publishing the changes to your live site.
Switch environments: Use the Live | Staging selector in the top‑right header to toggle between environments.
Publish to Live (irreversible): When satisfied, click Publish to push changes to live environment. This pushes all changes from Staging to Live and is irreversible. Review your changes carefully before publishing. Upon confirming, your site will be published within the next 2 to 5 minutes.
Should you ever need to remove your existing staging environment and start afresh, simply click on the \"Delete\" button to initiate the process.
Best Practices for Using the Staging Environment
NOTE: Direct changes made in the live sites won’t get updated in Staging Environment site.\n
Regular Backups: Before making any significant changes in your staging environment, ensure you have recent backups of your live site. This precautionary measure allows you to restore your site if any issues arise during testing.
Testing Checklist: Develop a testing checklist that outlines the specific elements, features, and functionalities you need to test. This checklist helps ensure comprehensive testing and prevents oversight.
Content Review: Thoroughly review all content changes, including text, images, and multimedia elements, to ensure accuracy, consistency, and relevance.
Reconciliation: Before publishing changes to the live site, reconcile any differences or conflicts between the staging and live environments. Ensure that all necessary updates have been synchronised.
Cleanup: Regularly clean up your staging environment by removing outdated or unnecessary files, databases, and configurations. This helps maintain an efficient and clutter-free workspace.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Do changes in Staging affect my live site?
No. Edits in Staging do not impact Live until you publish to Live.
Q: What happens when I publish from Staging to Live?
All staging changes are pushed to Live and the action is irreversible.
Q: Why are some areas disabled when I’m in Staging?
Those are Live‑only features. You’ll see a message prompting you to switch to Live to access them.
Q: How long does creating a staging environment take?
Preparation may take some time, duration can vary.
At any time of the day or night, seven days a week, you can begin a new LIVE chat with one of our SourCherry Support Agents! To access your support options, select the blue question mark in the top right corner of the SourCherry Application (Available on Desktop only). From here, you can choose the support option that best fits your schedule or needs.
IMPORTANT: Only Agency Admins/Users Can Access SourCherry Support\n SourCherry Support agents are unable to make changes to an agency account without the consent of a validated Agency Admin or Agency User. If you do not have access to the Agency view, you must reach out to your Agency Admin.
Who Can Access SourCherry Support?
Only Agency Admins/Users Can Access SourCherry Support. SourCherry Support agents are unable to make changes to an agency account without the consent of a validated Agency Admin or Agency User. If you do not have access to the Agency view, you must reach out to your Agency Admin.
Only Agency Admins/Users See the Support Button
If you are an agency admin or agency user, you will see the blue button in the top right corner of the screen where you can get support from SourCherry as shown in the image below.
Location Admins/Users Do Not See the Support Button
You can see in the image below that location admins and location users will NOT be able to access SourCherry support. The blue support button in the top right corner is not even visible as you can see in the image below.
Customer Support Options
SourCherry customers have access to multiple different support channels so you can choose the one that best fits your support needs, preference, or busy work schedule. You can learn more about the different support channels below!
Zoom Support Call - Jump directly into a live Zoom room with the SourCherry support team where you can get your questions answered and get hands-on help with any issue you're currently facing!
Live Chat Support - Speak directly to our support team using our live chat inside of your SourCherry account!
Support Ticketing - Open a support ticket for any inquiries or issues you're facing, and communicate back and forth with our support team via email.
Phone Support - Call our support team using our dedicated support phone number.
IMPORTANT: In order to receive email support from our team, you will need to open a support ticket. SourCherry does NOT have a general support email address.
Zoom Support Calls
If you need face-to-face support from our team, you can quickly and easily join our Zoom support rooms and chat with a support agent who will answer your questions and guide you through your support inquiries in person!
Once you request a Zoom call, you will be added to a queue where you will wait for the next available support agent. This agent will help you troubleshoot the issue you're experiencing live on Zoom and do their best to resolve the issue right then and there.
PLEASE NOTE: If the issue cannot be resolved during the Zoom call, the support agent will open a support ticket for your issue and you will need to resolve the issue using email communication with our team.
Live Chat Support
If you need support, and you don't want to jump in a Zoom call, you can simply start a chat session with our expert agents using the live chat directly inside of you account! Our agents will gather as much information as they can about the issue you're having, and do their best to help you solve the problem right then and there.
If the issue cannot be solved, the agents will escalate the issue to a team that may be better suited to help, and create a support ticket for your issue so that you can maintain communication with our support staff while the issue is being addressed.
You can choose between AI Support Chat and Agent Chat.
Support Ticketing via Email
IMPORTANT: In order to receive email support from our team, you will need to open a support ticket. SourCherry does NOT have a general support email address\n
If you are too busy to speak to our team on a Zoom call or live chat, you can always just create a support ticket immediately and communicate back and forth with our support staff via email at your earliest convenience.
We would like to ask that you respond as soon as possible to any email coming from our team so that we can get your support issue resolved as fast as we can. You're experience in SourCherry is our #1 priority, so we want to make sure any issue you're having are resolved fast so you can get back to growing your business!
Follow the steps in the video below to raise a support ticket, choose your area of concern as per your scenario and add as much details as possible to receive faster support and resolution.
What's Included in a Support Ticket?
1. Why You're Receiving The Ticket Email
In this initial email, you will see a few possibilities as to why you're chat was converted into a support ticket.
These usually include:
Our support team provided you with a troubleshooting step or resolution but you did not confirm if that step resolved the issue.
Our support team asked you for additional information and did not receive it.
2. Next Steps
We outline what steps you can take to further investigate the support issue and hopefully resolve it.
3. Conversation History
The email you receive from our support team will have a full history of the original conversation you had with our support agent(s) so that you can go back and reference anything that was initially talked about during that conversation with our team.
Phone Support
At any time of the day, you can call +1 (888) 732-4197 for any sales, billing, or login related issues. We validate all inbound callers, no matter the caller, to confirm they are an Agency Admin.
IMPORTANT: We Validate All Inbound Callers to make sure they are Agency Admins. We WILL NOT serve Non-Agency Admins who call the support phone number.
We cannot service non-agency admins that call in. We will need to validate your identity as an Agency Admin - we will encourage you to reach out to another Agency Admin to grant you access or reach out on your behalf. Your security for your agency account matters to us.
If your Agency SourCherry email is not the best one to reach you at, please mention this to Support. If your email is associated with multiple agencies, provide the correct agency name and relationship number of the account in question.
Please have your Agency Relationship Number and your Agency Login Email ready for the phone support team.
How to Get Support for Affiliate Concerns?
How to Create an Agency \"Admin\" to get SourCherry Support?
PLEASE NOTE: In order to add a user, you will need to be an Agency Admin. You will need to notify the user with login info and password. Once the user logs in they can update their password.
Go to Agency Settings > Click on the Team tab > Click + Add Employee button and complete:
User Info: Email, phone number and password is required
User Permissions: Select the user permission you wish your user to have
Make sure that the User Type section is Agency
Select the User Role as Admin
Click on Add To Account and select the location(s) you want this user to manage
Hit Save.
Frequently Asked Questions
IMPORTANT:Have your Agency information ready so our team can verify your identity and make sure you are an agency admin or account owner.
Q: Does SourCherry have a support email address?
No, we do not have a support email. The main reason is because our support flow is very detailed so that we can properly identify the issue the user is experiencing, and create a ticket in our support software that includes all the information needed for our support agents to help resolve the issue.
If we had a general support email address, then all emails sent to that address would create support tickets, and they may not include the proper information needed to give our support staff the best chance to help resolve the issue.
Q: How to Contact Support if I can't Login to SourCherry?
If you are having trouble logging into your SourCherry application, and you need to get support outside of the application, you have the following options to contact SourCherry support:
Phone Support: Call this number to reach our support if you're having trouble loggin in (+1 (888) 732-4197)
Website Chat Widget: You can also reach out support staff if you navigate to our main website and use our website chat widget. Make sure to tell our team that you are having trouble logging in, and that you need help from support.
Email Support: Submit a ticket using this form and our team will get on it right away.
Q: Why I'm not seeing the Blue Question Mark button in my dashboard?
The blue question mark button and its features are only visible to users logged in as a \"Agency Admin\" or \"Agency User\".
Location Admins and Location UserswillNOTseethe bluequestionmarkbutton, this is strictly for Agency Admins and Agency Users.
Additional Self-Service Support Resources
It is frustrating when we need help but can't get it as fast as we'd like it. That's why we've provided these hacks and tips below to help you get the fastest resolution time possible.
1. Check out our knowledge base and YouTube channel
PLEASE NOTE: To get into our Facebook Group you need to provide your email address (the one used upon sign up), your Agency Name and agree to the community rules.
While this guide is for anyone sending emails through the platform, it is specifically designed for those using LC Email and LC Email Dedicated Domain features. Those using a Custom SMTP Provider that is not LC Email will need to consult their provider directly — support will be limited for email compliance and best practices not managed by the platform.
Now that we know who this is for, let's hop into our guide together as we review Email Best Practices and Email Sending Recommendations below.
2
Email Best Practices
Now that your new sending domain is set up, follow these essential practices to ensure emails land in the inbox — not the spam folder.
Best Practice 1
Set Up a Dedicated Email Sending Domain
What is it? Rather than sharing an IP or domain with all other users, a dedicated email domain is a single private domain you use to send and receive emails. With LC Email, you have the ability to create your own dedicated domain in-app. Custom SMTP users do not have this option.
Why it matters: Not having a dedicated email sending domain often results in emails going to spam despite good practices. A dedicated domain gives you full control over your reputation and email deliverability.
Already have a dedicated domain but emails still go to spam? It is better to set up a new sub-domain than to try to repair a damaged one. See the FAQ section below for more details.
Best Practice 2
Set Up a Dedicated Sending IP Address
What is it? A dedicated IP address means your emails go out from a unique, exclusive IP — not shared with anyone else. Email service providers (ESPs) use IP reputation to judge deliverability, so exclusive ownership gives you full control.
Why it matters: With a shared LC Email dedicated domain, you still share the sending IP with all other platform users. A dedicated IP isolates your reputation — especially important when sending 200,000+ emails per week.
Cost: $59 per month per IP, billed to the agency billing card on file. Agencies can configure rebilling to pass this cost to sub-accounts. See pricing details here.
What is it? Email Validation checks whether an email address is valid before you send to it. Sending to invalid addresses harms your domain reputation and deliverability.
Why it matters: Sending to invalid or non-existent addresses causes bounces, hurts your domain reputation, and can result in emails being rejected entirely or going to spam.
How to enable it:
First-send validation: Sub-Account View → Business Profile → scroll to \"Verify Email Address when the first email is sent to a new contact\" → enable the checkbox.
Re-validation every 90 days: Agency View → Sub-accounts → click on the sub-account name → scroll to \"Enable Re-validation for 90 days.\"
Cost: $2.50 per 1,000 email validations — significantly cheaper than most major providers. See rebilling options.
Best Practice 4
Add Your DMARC Record
What is it? A DMARC record provides instructions to receiving servers on how to handle incoming mail. Messages must pass DKIM and SPF alignment checks per your DMARC policy — those that fail can be rejected, reported, or sent to spam.
Why add it? Missing or misconfigured DMARC records negatively impact your domain reputation. Mailbox providers count it against you, resulting in emails landing in spam.
How to add it: Log into your DNS provider and add the following TXT record:
Field
Value
Type
TXT
Name
_dmarc
Content
v=DMARC1; p=reject
Verify your DMARC record with the DMARC Checker tool. Additional resources:
What is it? The \"From Email\" is what recipients see when they receive your email. Your sending domain might be mail.yourdomain.com, but your From Email can be you@yourdomain.com or you@mail.yourdomain.com.
Why it matters: Using a From Email on a different organizational domain from your sending domain can result in poor deliverability and DMARC misalignment.
Rules: Use a From Email on the same organizational domain as your dedicated sending domain. If your sending domain is a subdomain (e.g., mail.company.com), you can use either name@company.com or name@mail.company.com — deliverability is the same when SPF, DKIM, and DMARC are set up correctly.
What is it? An unsubscribe link allows recipients to opt out of future emails from you.
Why it matters: Not including an unsubscribe link will severely harm your email deliverability rates — and can get you flagged as a spammer.
How to set it up: Use the \"Footer\" element in the email builder. You have two options:
Default Unsubscribe Link — Quick and easy for LC Email users. Non-LC Email users should use the custom option instead.
Custom Unsubscribe Link — Full control over the unsubscribe flow. Works for all email providers.
Best Practice 7
Use Double Opt-In
What is it? Double opt-in asks subscribers to confirm their intent twice — for example, filling out a form and then clicking a verification link in a confirmation email. Only after completing both steps will they receive further emails.
Why it matters: Double opt-ins significantly boost domain reputation and deliverability. Recipients who have confirmed twice are more likely to open, click, and engage — all positive signals for inbox providers.
What is it? Stop sending to contacts who take no action — no opens, no clicks — across multiple campaigns.
Why it matters: Sending to engaged recipients helps your emails land in the inbox. Low engagement signals (few opens or clicks) push emails toward spam.
How to do it: If someone hasn't taken action after weeks of emails, reduce your sending frequency or remove them from your list. Focus on recipients who are actively engaging.
It is better to stop sending to an unengaged recipient than to have them unsubscribe or mark your email as spam.
Best Practice 9
Send Regularly — But Not Too Regularly
What is it? Sending frequency is a major factor in domain reputation. Sending too infrequently (once a month) or too frequently (multiple times a day) can both harm your deliverability — especially if the frequency changes suddenly.
Why it matters: Inbox providers use engagement signals and sending consistency to assess your reputation. Erratic patterns — or sudden volume spikes — look suspicious.
Recommended cadence:
For newly opted-in contacts: send daily for a short initial window to drive conversion.
If no engagement after 1–2 weeks: slow down to weekly sends.
If no engagement after 2+ months of weekly sends: stop sending entirely.
For promotional blasts: keep them spaced out and concise. It is always better to undersend than to oversend.
It is better to stop sending to an unengaged recipient than to have them unsubscribe or mark your email as spam.
3
Email Warm-Up
Mailbox providers will often send emails from new dedicated domains straight to spam — because anyone, including spammers, can register a new domain. Following the best practices above alongside the warm-up recommendations below will greatly improve your chances of landing in the inbox.
Email Sending Recommendations
Warm-Up Volume Schedule
Only send to opted-in contacts and stay within these daily and hourly limits at each stage.
The schedule above shows how many emails you can send per hour and per day at each warm-up stage. Stage 1 allows up to 100 per hour and 1,000 per day. Stage 2 increases to 300 per hour and 2,500 per day. Remember: the stage is not just how long you have owned the domain — it reflects your current sending phase and the health of your domain at that moment.
Stay within the recommended sending volume per stage
Send fewer emails per day or hour than the maximum if you can
Only send to opted-in contacts with a high likelihood of engagement — cold emailing during warm-up tends to harm deliverability
Keep email content short and to the point; include an appropriate image where possible
Do not use public link shorteners (bit.ly, tiny.url, etc.) — these are a common spam signal
4
Email Tools
Use these free tools to test, track, and monitor your email domain health.
Tool 1
Test the Spamminess of Your Emails
Email content itself can impact deliverability. Too much text, spam-trigger words, or URL shorteners can cause inbox providers to flag your message. Use mail-tester.com to get a spam score before sending:
Copy the test email address provided by Mail-Tester
Create a new contact in the platform using that email address
Send your email to that contact
Return to Mail-Tester and click \"Then check my score\"
Review the score and make adjustments based on the feedback
Tool 2
Review Your Email Health Report
Paste your sending domain into the MX Toolbox Email Health Report to quickly check for common issues — blacklisting, missing DMARC records, MX errors, and more. This is a great starting point for any deliverability troubleshooting.
Tool 3 — Advanced
Google Postmaster Tools
Using data from all Gmail users you send to, the Google Postmaster Tool monitors your ongoing email performance and provides detailed reporting on:
Spam rate
IP Reputation
Domain Reputation
Feedback Loop
Authentication
Encryption
Delivery errors
Note: It can take up to two days for Google to populate data in your reports. If data is missing, refresh the page, clear your cache, or use an incognito window to rule out caching issues.
5
Troubleshooting
There are many reasons emails go to spam — URL shorteners, content issues, poor list health, and more. If emails are landing in spam, work through these steps in order:
Step 1
Check How Long You've Been Sending
A domain can take up to 4 weeks to warm up. If you are within that window, stay consistent with the Email Best Practices and Email Sending Recommendations above and use the Email Tools section to monitor progress.
Step 2
Check Your MX Records
Confirm your MX records are installed and resolving correctly. Use the Email Health Report from the Email Tools section above to verify.
Step 3
Ensure Your DMARC Record Is Set Up
Confirm your DMARC record is applied and valid. See the Best Practice 4 section above for setup instructions and verification tools.
Step 4
Reach Out to Support
If you've confirmed the three steps above and are still experiencing issues, contact support for further assistance. How to reach support.
6
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: What about cold email outreach?
Cold emailing means contacting people who haven't opted in — and it's generally not recommended, especially for new domains. If you do use cold outreach, make sure to validate emails, enable bounce protection, and avoid using your primary sending domain. Use a separate sub-account and domain to protect your reputation.
Cold email pro tips:
Validate emails and filter out invalid addresses
Send small batches and drip slowly
Warm up your domain first
Never use your primary sending domain for cold outreach
Use purpose-built cold email tools to qualify leads before importing them
Third-party tools like instantly.ai or smartlead.ai can help manage cold outreach. Once leads engage, you can move them into the platform. (These tools are not affiliated with or endorsed by the platform.)
Q: What if I already have a dedicated sending domain but emails are still going to spam?
Some spam filtering early on is normal during warm-up. If your domain is already warmed up and emails are still going to spam, it is generally better to set up a new sub-domain than to attempt to repair the damaged one's reputation.
Q: Should I share the same dedicated sending domain across multiple sub-accounts?
No. Do not share sending domains across sub-accounts. Each sub-account should have its own dedicated domain to maintain strong, isolated deliverability and avoid cross-account reputation issues.
Q: What is email warm-up?
Email warm-up is the process of gradually increasing your sending volume to build a good reputation with inbox providers. Starting slow and scaling up over time signals to mailbox providers that you are a legitimate sender — helping your emails avoid spam folders.
Q: What is email deliverability?
Email deliverability is your ability to land emails in the inbox rather than the spam folder. It is influenced by sender reputation, list health, content quality, authentication setup (SPF, DKIM, DMARC), and recipient engagement.
Q: What is domain reputation?
Domain reputation is how mailbox providers rate your domain's trustworthiness as a sender. A strong reputation gets your emails delivered to the inbox; a poor reputation means spam filters. Reputation is built through consistent, engaged sending over time.
Q: How long until a domain is fully warmed up?
Generally around 4 weeks. Stick to the best practices throughout the process and use the Email Tools to monitor your domain reputation and progress.
Q: What happens if I send more than the recommended volume?
Sending too much too soon can damage your domain reputation and may get your domain or IP blacklisted. Always follow the volume guidelines for your current warm-up stage to stay safe.
Q: What are the differences between LC Email and a Custom SMTP Provider?
LC Email is the built-in sending solution with native deliverability tools, validation, dedicated domain setup, and support assistance. With a Custom SMTP Provider, you are responsible for all setup and troubleshooting — support's ability to assist with compliance and deliverability issues is limited.
Q: What is a dedicated domain?
A dedicated domain gives you complete control over your email sending reputation by keeping your activity isolated from other senders. This separation improves inbox placement and lets you build a clean reputation from scratch.
Q: How do I send emails in drip mode (hourly and daily sending)?
Use Bulk Actions or Workflows to stagger your sends across time. This prevents volume spikes that can trigger spam filters and helps maintain consistent sending patterns that inbox providers trust. How to Send Emails in Drip Mode.
Q: What is an email bounce?
A bounce occurs when your email cannot be delivered to the recipient's mailbox. There are two types:
Hard Bounce — The address is invalid or does not exist. Remove these contacts immediately.
Soft Bounce — A temporary issue such as a full inbox or server delay. The email may be retried automatically.
The Conversation AI Bot in Auto-pilot mode is designed to facilitate instant responses to leads and conversations at any time, enhancing user interaction and engagement. This article provides a comprehensive overview of accessing, configuring, and optimizing the Auto-pilot mode for efficient conversation management.
Navigate to the Conversation AI settings located in the Sub-account settings.
In the \"bot settings\" tab, you will find the new mode \"Auto-pilot.\"
Features:
Inbound Message Handling: The bot waits for a configured amount of time before collecting all messages of a conversation and replying to the contact.
Channel Availability: Auto-pilot is available for SMS, Facebook, and Instagram, and the channels can be configured in the Bot Settings tab.
Sleep Mode: The bot goes to sleep for 2 hours in case of a manual or a workflow-based message.
Feedback Mechanism: Every message from the Auto-pilot Bot will contain Thumbs up and Thumbs down to provide feedback, add FAQs, and train the bot.
Appointment Booking: The bot's primary goal is to get appointment bookings for your business and sends the booking/scheduling link directly to the contact based on the selected calendar.
Advanced Auto-pilot Settings:
Business Name Configuration: Allows setting up a business name for the conversation AI bot.
Wait Time before Responding: Configurable time between 1 second and 5 minutes, allowing the bot to collect all messages before responding. The default limit is 2 mins.
Maximum Message Limit: The bot will go to sleep if this limit is reached in a conversation. To activate the bot again, mark the conversation as \"Read.\" The default limit is 10 messages in a single conversation.
Training the Bot:
Training the bot is crucial for optimizing its performance. Users can train the bot based on URLs or FAQs, and the bot trial is free of charge. For detailed instructions on training the bot, refer to Training the Conversation AI Bot.
Pricing:
Bot training and trial are free of charge. Once the settings are changed from off to either suggestive or autopilot, a charge of five cents per generation is applicable.
Fully Automatic AI Bot Demo Video:
FAQs
Q: How can I access the Auto-pilot mode?
A: Navigate to Conversation AI settings in the Sub-account settings and select \"Auto-pilot\" in the \"bot settings\" tab.
Q: Can I configure the wait time before the bot responds?
A: Yes, you can configure the wait time between 1 second and 5 minutes in the advanced settings.
Q: Is there a charge for bot training and trial?
A: No, bot training and trial are free of charge.
Q: How can I provide feedback to the bot?
A: Every Auto-pilot Bot's message will contain Thumbs up and Thumbs down options for providing feedback and training the bot.
Q: Can I configure the business name for the Conversation AI bot?
A: Yes, you can configure the business name in the advanced Auto-pilot settings.
Q: Is there a limit to the number of messages a bot can send to a contact?
A: Yes, the default limit is 10 messages in a single conversation, after which the bot goes to sleep.
Q: How can I reactivate the bot once it goes to sleep?
A: To reactivate the bot, mark the conversation as \"Read.\"
Q: How does the Auto-pilot bot handle multiple inbound messages?
A: The bot waits for a configured amount of time to collect all messages in a conversation before responding, allowing it to understand the context better and respond to all messages in one go.
Q: Can the Auto-pilot bot be used across different platforms like SMS, Facebook, and Instagram?
A: Yes, the Auto-pilot bot is versatile and can be configured to respond on SMS, Facebook, and Instagram through the Bot Settings tab.
Q: Is it possible to test the bot’s responses before enabling it?
A: Absolutely, you can utilize the bot trial feature to assess the bot’s responses in real-time to various messages and intents before enabling it.
Q: What happens if the bot receives a message manually or through a workflow?
A: The bot will go to sleep for a duration of 2 hours if it receives a manual or a workflow-based message.
Q: Is there an unlimited usage plan available for the Auto-pilot mode?
A: An unlimited plan is under development and will soon be available, offering unlimited usage per location.
Q: Can the Auto-pilot mode be configured for almost instant responses?
A: Yes, the wait time can be configured to as low as one second for the bot to respond almost instantly.
The Auto-pilot mode of the Conversation AI Bot is a powerful tool designed to enhance user interaction and engagement by providing instant responses to leads and conversations. By understanding and utilizing its features and settings effectively, users can optimize their conversation management and improve their business's overall communication strategy.
\n \n\n\n
",
"media": {
"images": [],
"gifs": [],
"videos": [
"https://www.youtube.com/embed/sGyUIHafIL8??si=WKzLF9f21ZaQ-vjN&wmode=opaque"
]
},
"internalLinks": [
"155000000996",
"155000000210"
],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": true,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": false
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:23:46.542Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000001034",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000001034-how-to-copy-contacts-from-one-sub-account-to-another-sub-account-",
"title": "How to copy contacts from one sub-account to another sub-account?",
"originalTitle": "How to copy contacts from one sub-account to another sub-account?",
"slug": "how-to-copy-contacts-from-one-sub-account-to-another-sub-account",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Learn how to use SourCherry's 'Copy Contact' workflow action to duplicate contacts between sub-accounts, including tags and custom fields, while maintaining data integrity.
Agencies must be on any High-Level plan ($97, $297, $497, or their annual equivalents).
LC Premium Triggers & Actions must be enabled via Agency Settings.
Existing and new sub-accounts will have 100 free executions once Premium Actions & Triggers are enabled.
To avoid execution costs for existing sub-accounts, rebilling needs to be enabled manually for each sub-account within the Agency view.
If premium actions are enabled on the SaaS Configurator, new sub-accounts generated will automatically be enrolled in LC Premium Actions & Triggers, requiring no further action by the agency.
Steps for Copying a Contact
1. Navigate to the Workflow Builder in your SourCherry dashboard and create a new workflow or edit an existing one.
2. Add the 'Copy Contact to Sub-Account' workflow action.
3. Configure the action by selecting the target sub-account.
4. Optionally, enable the following settings:
Copy Tags: To duplicate tags from the source contact. Organize your contacts effectively by adding multiple tags to newly copied contacts in your selected sub-account. You can choose tags from the source contact information or even create new ones manually.
Copy Custom Fields: To duplicate custom fields, provided they exist in the target sub-account.
Update Contact if it Already Exists: To update existing contacts in the target sub-account.
Skip Copy if Contact Lacks Email and Name: To prevent copying incomplete contacrecords.
Copy Custom Fields
If enabled, contact custom fields will be copied to the selected account. The custom field value will be copied only if that field exists in the selected account.
Toggle : Update contact if it already exists
If this is enabled and if the contact already exists in the selected sub-account then the contact will be updated in the sub account.
If the contact is not existing in the sub account then new contact will be created.
Skip Copy Contact if Contact does not have Email and Name
If a contact does not have an Email or a Name then the contact won’t be copied and will be skipped.
What will be copied?
Below fields will be copied when Copy Contact action is used -
Contact info
General info
Tags (Copy tags toggle must be turned on in the Copy contact action)
Custom fields (Copy Custom fields toggle must be turned on in the Copy contact action and same custom field should be available in the sub account) (The custom field type should be same in both accounts)
What will not be copied?
Details such as Conversations, Activity, Notes, Tasks, Appointments, Payments, and independently transferred Documents/Files will not be copied.
Documents / Files - File and document transfer is not supported as part of the Copy Contact action. Files are not migrated to the destination sub-account as standalone assets. In some cases, file references associated with the copied contact may still depend on the original contact or source record. If the original contact is deleted from the source account, those associated files may become inaccessible. If you need to preserve access to important files, keep the original contact in the source account.
Automatically publish new items from any valid RSS/Atom feed to your connected social channels using Social Planner → RSS Post. This is perfect for sharing your latest blog posts, podcast episodes, videos, or news—without manual work.
IMPORTANT: Posting to Twitter/X via RSS is not supported due to API restrictions. All other supported networks in Social Planner can be used with RSS.
RSS (Really Simple Syndication) can be a valuable tool for managing and curating content in social media. Here are some ways RSS can help in social media:
Content Curation: Aggregate content from various sources into one feed to easily discover relevant items to share.
Automated Content Sharing: Auto‑post content to your social accounts to save time and maintain a consistent flow.
Stay Updated with Industry Trends: Subscribe to industry blogs/news to create timely, relevant posts.
Reduce Information Overload: Consolidate content in one place instead of browsing many sites.
Share User‑Generated Content: Monitor community/forum feeds and share standout contributions.
Maintain a Consistent Posting Schedule: Use scheduling tools with RSS to keep a steady cadence.
Prerequisites
A valid RSS/Atom feed URL (e.g., from your blog or YouTube channel).
Social accounts connected in Marketing → Social Planner → Settings (e.g., Facebook Page, Instagram Business, LinkedIn Profile/Page, Google Business Profile, Pinterest).
How to find the RSS Feed?
RSS feeds are still very much alive, though they may be a bit trickier to locate these days. Unlike in the past, browsers no longer highlight them, and websites don't always prominently display RSS links. However, the majority of sites do offer RSS feeds. Let's explore some quick ways to find them when a simple Google search isn't enough.
For instance, a substantial number of websites are built using WordPress, accounting for over 40% of the web. This means there's a high likelihood that the website you're visiting is a WordPress site, and they typically offer easily discoverable RSS feeds.
To find a WordPress RSS feed, just add \"/feed\" to the end of the URL. For instance, https://justinpot.com/feed. This method works in most cases and is my go-to approach for finding RSS feeds.
If this doesn't yield results, here are a few additional tricks to try on other types of sites:
YouTube channel pages can serve as RSS feeds. Just copy and paste the channel's URL into your RSS reader.
You can also find an OPML file containing all your subscriptions there.
If none of these methods proves successful, you can resort to checking a webpage's source code. Don't worry, it's simpler than it sounds.
Right-click on an empty space on the website where you'd like to find an RSS feed, then select \"View Page Source\" (the phrasing might vary slightly depending on your browser).
Next, search the code by pressing Ctrl+F (Windows, Linux) or Command+F (Mac). Start with a search for \"RSS,\" like so:
If \"rss\" doesn't yield results, try \"atom\" instead. Look for an RSS URL, as shown above, then copy and paste it into your feed reader. Happy feed hunting!
How to Create Posts using RSS Feed?
Set up an RSS-to-social flow in Social Planner so new items from your feed auto-publish to your connected channels on a schedule.
Step 1: Navigate to RSS Post
Navigate to Marketing > Social Planner. Click on \"New Post\", and there will be an option to select the \"RSS Post\"
Step 2: Add URL
Add the URL of RSS Feed [ Check above how to find the RSS URL]
Step 3: Select Socials
Select the socials where you would like to post.
Step 4: Add Ending
You can add \"End with\" option to append any text, hashtags or links.
Step 5: Update Time
Select the option to update the feed update - from every 5 mins to once a day
Step 6: Select Maximum Posts
Select how many unique posts should be fetched from your RSS feed each time it checks for new content (minimum 1 to maximum 5).
For example, if you choose '3', the system will pull up to the 3 most recent items from the RSS feed at the time of posting.
This does not mean the same post will be published multiple times. Each fetched item will be published once as its own social post.
Step 7: (Optional) Include RSS Item Description in Your Posts
You can now choose whether to include the RSS item description when publishing posts.
Enable Include Description to publish posts with both the title and description from the RSS feed
Disable it to continue publishing title-only posts
Use the multi-item preview (up to 5 items) to review formatting, content length, and truncation before saving
This option helps you better control how much content is shared and ensures posts are optimized for different social platforms.
When you publish RSS posts to multiple social networks, Social Planner generates post text per platform, based on each network’s character limits. This helps reduce unexpected truncation when the same RSS item posts to different platforms.\n\nUse the multi-item preview (up to 5 items) to confirm formatting and where truncation may occur before you save.
How RSS Duplicate Protection Works
Social Planner now tracks RSS feed items for 90 days to prevent missed or duplicate posts.
When the RSS feed syncs, Social Planner checks each feed item individually. It identifies each item by its GUID. If no GUID is available, it uses the item’s link and title.
This helps Social Planner:
Publish valid feed items once
Skip duplicate feed items
Detect items that appear late or out of order
Continue working with existing RSS automations without manual changes
Frequently Asked Questions
Q. Can I change frequency later?
Yes, edit the RSS post to adjust Update Time or Maximum Posts.
Q. Will the same article post multiple times?
No. Each item is published once. If there’s no new content, nothing is posted.
Q. Which networks are supported?
Most Social Planner–supported networks can be selected. X (formerly Twitter) is not supported.
Q. Do images appear automatically?
Link previews are controlled by each social network. For the most reliable visuals, include featured images and Open Graph tags on the source page.
Q. Why does the same RSS item look different on different social networks?
Social networks have different character limits. Social Planner generates RSS post text per platform, so the same RSS item may truncate differently depending on the network.
Send from an exclusive IP address — take full control of your email sender reputation and deliverability.
Dedicated IPs offer a distinct advantage by sending your email messages from a unique, exclusive IP address. Email service providers (ESPs) closely monitor the reputation and behaviour of an IP address to determine the deliverability of emails linked to specific domains associated with that IP.
Getting a dedicated IP address provides your organization with exclusive ownership, giving you full control over the management of the email sender reputation and deliverability tied to that IP.
This article will cover what Dedicated IP in LC Email is, pricing, why the feature was built, and several FAQs.
If you're sending a significant volume of emails, in the ballpark of hundreds of thousands to millions per month (especially if exceeding 200,000), it becomes prudent to establish your reputation on a dedicated IP. It's worth noting that obtaining a dedicated IP might be a distinct investment.
Furthermore, when setting up email authentication protocols, including SPF, DMARC, DKIM, and SSL certificates to bolster protection against email spoofing, a dedicated IP becomes vital. Shared IPs don't offer the same level of security, leaving you vulnerable to the actions of other senders using the same IP.
Additionally, possessing a dedicated IP shields you from potential domain hijacking risks, ensuring the integrity and security of your email communications.
What are the benefits of a dedicated IP?
While a dedicated IP might come with higher costs compared to a shared IP, it presents several distinct advantages:
1
Enhanced Email Delivery
Dedicated IPs often result in faster email delivery. Renowned email service providers like Gmail and Yahoo tend to favour emails from dedicated IPs, ensuring quicker inbox placement. Without sharing bandwidth, your performance isn't influenced by others using the same IP.
2
Full Control Over Sender and IP Reputation
As the sole user of a dedicated IP, you have total control over your sending habits, IP reputation, and SEO efforts. This allows you to customize your strategies without external interference.
3
Efficient Problem Resolution
Being the only sender on your dedicated IP simplifies identifying and addressing IP-related issues. Pinpointing problems and implementing solutions becomes more straightforward, improving overall reliability.
4
Enhanced Cybersecurity
A dedicated IP provides an additional layer of protection against threats like domain hijacking, malware, and hacking attempts, ensuring better security for your online resources.
While dedicated IPs might be more costly, the tangible benefits they offer in performance, control, problem-solving, and security make them a valuable investment for organizations with significant online and email needs.
What are some tips for sending emails with dedicated IPs?
Within the world of email service providers (ESPs), your reputation is critical. With a dedicated IP, the challenge is to manage email volume and timing adeptly to prevent activating spam filters. Ideally, you should pace your email dispatches, allowing for a gradual increase in volume every 24 hours.
Dedicated IPs are most beneficial when consistently dispatching large volumes of emails. However, sporadic, high-volume sending can be counterproductive, potentially flagging you as a spammer to email filters or even resulting in blocklisting. ESPs are particularly wary of abrupt surges in email dispatches.
If your email traffic is inconsistently high, a shared IP might be more advantageous. This aligns your intermittent high volumes with the steady traffic patterns of other senders on the same IP.
Through thorough testing and adjustments, we've perfected and automated the dedicated IP warm-up process, ensuring a robust sender reputation. Users may experience a transitional period where their emails alternate between the dedicated IP and their old shared IP in a 50/50 split until the dedicated IP is fully warmed up.\n\nNote: Users may still be in the warmup phase even after a considerable amount of time has passed since the IP was assigned.
Who can buy a dedicated IP?
Dedicated IPs are exclusively available for Agencies on the $297/$2970 and $497/$4970 plans.\n\nWe strongly advise sending a minimum of 50,000 messages per week to uphold a robust reputation and reduce throttling issues with mailbox providers. Additionally, we recommend allocating one dedicated IP address for every 1 million messages sent monthly.\n\nAgency: An agency that has been established within the last 14 days is eligible to purchase the IP.\n\nSub-accounts: Accounts with a total contact count exceeding 10,000 or those that have sent more than 50,000 emails in the last 10 days, and belong to an agency type created within the last 14 days, are eligible to acquire the IP.\n\nPayment setup exists in the sub-account: If payment setup is missing, the purchase flow will not continue.\n\nDedicated IP purchase is enabled by the agency: If the agency has not enabled Dedicated IP purchase for sub-accounts, the purchase flow will not continue.
Both Agencies and sub-accounts can purchase a dedicated IP if they are using LC - Email as the Email provider.
Note: Non-SaaS locations are eligible to purchase if the Agency grants permission. This setup is detailed on the Agency Sub-accounts page.
How to buy a Dedicated IP?
LC Email users can acquire a dedicated IP through the Email service.
1
Go to Agency Settings
Navigate to the agency settings page and click on Email Services.
2
Open Dedicated Domain And IP
Click on Dedicated Domain And IP in the LC email provider section.
3
Click \"Buy IP\"
On the next page, click on \"Buy IP\".
4
Confirm Purchase
A modal will appear with the option to buy a new IP. Click on the \"Buy Now\" button to proceed with the purchase.
✓
Billing
One IP at $59 per month will be charged to the agency. The agency can set up rebilling to cover this cost.
How to Manage Your Dedicated IP
If you own a dedicated sending domain, you'll notice a tag indicating whether your domain is associated with a Dedicated or Shared IP.
Note: A Dedicated IP can only be linked to a dedicated sending domain.
Additionally, you can assign one or more dedicated IPs to your domains. In this configuration, a single domain can be linked to multiple IPs, and vice versa. If your domain is associated with multiple IPs, emails will be sent through all these IPs in a round-robin manner. This method ensures a balanced distribution of email traffic among the IPs linked to your domain.
How To Assign a Dedicated IP to a Domain
1
Open Assign IP
Click the three dots next to your domain and select \"Assign IP\".
2
Select Your IP
The \"IP Assignment\" modal will appear, displaying all the IPs you've purchased. Select the IP you wish to assign to the domain.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: How can I bill my clients for usage?
If you're on the Pro-plan, you can rebill your clients, saving you the effort of manual billing.
Q: Will dedicated IP reselling work with ISV?
Absolutely! Agencies on the Pro Plan will maintain the capability to resell.
Display your company name as the sender instead of a third-party service — improve deliverability, trust, and brand consistency.
Overview
When recipients open your email, showing your company name in the \"From\" or \"Sender\" field is far more professional — and more trustworthy — than displaying \"Sent by Mailgun\" or another third-party service. Configuring reverse DNS (rDNS) on your dedicated IP is how you make that happen.
Proper rDNS setup improves deliverability, reduces the chance emails are flagged as spam, and keeps your branding consistent across every campaign you send.
Reverse DNS is essentially the opposite of a standard DNS lookup. Rather than mapping a domain name to an IP address, rDNS translates an IP address into its associated hostname. This works for both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses and is used to verify the authenticity of the server sending your email.
In practice, rDNS converts the IP address of your sending mail server into a hostname (e.g., mail.yourcompany.com). Mailbox providers perform this lookup to confirm that the IP belongs to a legitimate domain. In email sending, this allows your company name — not \"Sent by Mailgun.com\" — to appear as the sender in recipients' inboxes.
Important Distinction
rDNS configuration for your dedicated IP is not the same as masking the CNAME of mailgun.org in your DNS settings. These are two separate configurations. rDNS specifically controls what hostname appears when a mailbox provider looks up your sending IP address.
The Payoff
Correct rDNS setup ensures your company name is shown as the sender, improves inbox placement, and builds recipient trust — all without the recipient ever seeing the underlying delivery infrastructure.
2
Common rDNS Mistakes
Accurate rDNS configuration is critical for deliverability and sender reputation. These are the three most common mistakes to avoid:
Mistake 1
Incorrect or Missing PTR Record
A PTR (Pointer) record is required to verify that your sending mail server matches the IP address in the email. Without a valid PTR record, mailbox providers cannot confirm your identity. Ensure your PTR record is correctly configured and returns a valid hostname for the IP being queried.
The hostname returned by your PTR record must resolve back to the same IP address — and vice versa. This bidirectional check is called Forward-Confirmed Reverse DNS (FCrDNS). A mismatch causes lookup failures and reduces trust.
Example: If your PTR record returns mail.yourwebsite.com for IP 8.8.8.8, then a forward DNS lookup of mail.yourwebsite.com must also resolve to 8.8.8.8.
Mistake 3
Hostname That Doesn't Resolve
If the hostname in your PTR record doesn't resolve to any IP at all, mailbox providers will flag this as a significant trust issue — which can lead to delivery failures. Always verify that your A record is correctly published before submitting the hostname for rDNS.
Key Takeaway
Your PTR record must point to a valid hostname, and that hostname's A record must resolve back to the same IP. Both directions must be consistent and resolvable.
3
How to Set Up rDNS
Dedicated IP Required
rDNS can only be configured on a dedicated IP. Shared IPs do not support this because rDNS resolves to only one hostname per IP address. A dedicated IP is required for this setup.
Follow these steps to configure rDNS for your dedicated IP:
Step 1
Add an A Record at Your Hosting Provider
Log in to your DNS hosting provider and add an A record pointing your chosen hostname to your dedicated IP address. The record format will look like:
A mail.yourcomain.com 123.45.67.89
Step 2
Navigate to Agency Settings
Go to Agency Settings → Email Service.
Step 3
Open Dedicated Domain and IP
In the SMTP Service tab, click Dedicated Domain And IP in the SourCherry section.
Click Dedicated Domain And IP in the SourCherry SMTP section
Step 4
Open Reverse DNS (PTR) Settings
In the Dedicated IP section, click the three-dot menu next to your dedicated IP and select Reverse DNS (PTR).
Select Reverse DNS (PTR) from the three-dot menu on your dedicated IP
Step 5
Enter Your A Record Hostname
Enter the same hostname you used in your A record (e.g., mail.yourcompany.com). The PTR record will be updated on the back end to point to the hostname you provide.
Enter the hostname matching your A record to complete PTR configuration
You're All Set
Once the PTR record is updated, your dedicated IP will resolve to the hostname you configured. Mailbox providers will now display your company name as the sender rather than a third-party service name.
4
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I set up rDNS on a shared IP?
No. rDNS resolves to only one hostname per IP address, so it is only supported on dedicated IPs. Shared IPs are used by multiple senders and cannot be uniquely assigned to your domain's hostname.
Q: What is a PTR record and why does it matter?
A PTR (Pointer) record maps an IP address back to a hostname. Mailbox providers use it to verify that the server sending email is who it claims to be. Missing or incorrect PTR records are a common cause of email rejection and spam filtering.
Q: Does rDNS replace DKIM or SPF authentication?
No. rDNS, DKIM, and SPF serve different purposes and are all complementary. DKIM signs the email content, SPF authorizes sending IPs, and rDNS verifies the identity of the sending server's IP. For best deliverability, all three should be configured correctly.
Q: How long does it take for rDNS changes to propagate?
PTR record updates on the back end are typically applied quickly, but DNS propagation can take anywhere from a few minutes to 48 hours depending on TTL settings and how frequently resolvers cache records.
Q: How do I verify that my rDNS is set up correctly?
You can verify your rDNS by running a reverse DNS lookup on your dedicated IP using a tool like MXToolbox or the command line (nslookup / dig -x). The result should return your configured hostname. Then confirm a forward lookup of that hostname resolves back to your IP.
Q: Will rDNS affect how my emails look to recipients?
Yes. With correct rDNS, your company name or domain appears in the \"Sender\" or technical headers instead of a third-party service provider's name. This improves perceived legitimacy and brand recognition, particularly in clients that display the sending server details.
Q: Can I use any hostname, or does it need to match my sending domain?
The hostname doesn't have to exactly match your From domain, but it must be a valid, fully resolvable hostname that you own and control. Best practice is to use a subdomain of your primary sending domain (e.g., mail.yourcompany.com) for consistency and trust signals.
At the core of the SourCherry service is our subscription plans which are in three tiers. Starter, Unlimited, and Agency Pro. Each plan level unlocks additional features to help Level Up your business. Before you can utilize the additional services shown below, you must have an active subscription and account with us.
*Subject to change. We are always coming out with new features or adjusting our offerings to best serve you.
If you have a question about which features work with which plan or you're interested in upgrading to another plan, you can schedule a call with our Account Management Team.
How to Manage Your Billing
Did you know you can see every single charge to your account as well as manage your subscription, wallet amounts, and more from within your SourCherry App? We even break down charges by a sub-account, it's a critical tool when discussing or reviewing SourCherry charges or pricing.
Just log into your SourCherry desktop App and navigate to your Company Billing Settings (AgencyView > Settings > Billing).
What is an Agency Wallet
The Agency Wallet is used to pay for usage-based services in SourCherry. Instead of paying for a fixed package of usage each month, your agency is charged based on what is actually used.
To load credits into your wallet, SourCherry charges your Agency card on file. When a supported service is used, the charge is deducted from the Agency Wallet. If the wallet balance falls below your minimum balance, SourCherry automatically charges the agency card on file to refill the wallet. Common wallet-funded services include the Phone System, Email System, Email Validation, AI usage, Autocomplete Addresses, and Workflow Premium Features.
You can review your wallet balance, transaction history, recharge amount, and minimum wallet balance from Agency View > Settings > Billing > Wallet & Transactions.
The Phone System allows agencies and sub-accounts to buy phone numbers, send and receive SMS/MMS, and make or receive calls inside SourCherry. It removes the need to connect a separate third-party telephony provider for standard phone and messaging activity.
The Phone System is available on all SourCherry plan levels. Rebilling without markup is available on the $297/mo and $497/mo plans. Rebilling WITH Markup is only available on the $497/mo plan.
Pricing: The pricing for LC Phone System is precisely the same amount as Twilio. Pricing varies between regions and products for this reason we will be providing basic info and pricing for all the top-used product categories based on US/Canada pricing (LC Phone Pricing & Billing Guide). All other charges can be located on Twilio’s Pricing Pages provided below.
The Email System, also known as LC Email, allows agencies and sub-accounts to send and receive email inside SourCherry without connecting a separate third-party email provider like Mailgun. Email sending works out of the box for every sub-account, helping agencies manage email activity directly inside SourCherry. Email usage may include sent emails, forwarded emails, and other supported LC Email activity generated by sub-accounts.
The Email System is available on all SourCherry plan levels. Rebilling without markup is available on the $297/mo and $497/mo plans. Rebilling WITH Markup is only available on the $497/mo plan.
Pricing: Email usage is $0.675 per 1,000 emails across all plans.
For the latest LC Phone number and messaging rates, refer to the LC Phone Pricing & Billing Guide.
AI Employee is a suite of SourCherry AI tools that helps agencies automate conversations, content creation, review responses, and in-app assistance. AI Employee pricing is available under three plans. Choose the plan that fits your location's usage and billing preference.
AI Growth and AI Employee are billed monthly per enabled location. Pay-per-use does not have a monthly subscription fee; usage is billed only when supported AI products generate billable activity. All prices are in USD.
Pay-Per-Use: No monthly subscription fee for AI features. Usage is billed at token cost based on the models and actions used. This plan applies to any location that is not on AI Employee Growth or AI Employee Unlimited. It is useful for agencies that use AI occasionally or prefer usage-based billing.
AI Employee Unlimited Plan: Available for $97/month per enabled location. Unlimited usage across Conversation AI, Voice AI, Reviews AI, and Content AI, plus generous included usage for Ask AI and AI Studio, ideal for agencies ready to deploy AI at scale without worrying about hitting a ceiling, subject to fair use.
AI Employee Growth Plan: Available for $50/month per enabled location. Includes generous monthly limits across the full AI suite, ideal for scaling teams that want cost visibility and a predictable baseline without constantly watching usage.
Important: Phone System charges still apply to phone calls, even when Voice AI (Inbound) is covered under the AI Employee Unlimited subscription.
AI Employee Rebilling: AI Employee rebilling can be turned on in Agency settings. Your agency needs to be on the $497/mo plan to rebill AI Employee usage.
For additional details on AI Product Pricing, including the AI Employee Unlimited and Growth plans, see: AI Products Pricing
Reselling Services Pricing
Reselling Services are additional services your sub-accounts can use, purchase, or have enabled through your agency. Depending on the service and your plan, your agency can pass the cost to the client, set a client-facing price, or add a markup.
Service
Pricing
Ad Manager
$0/mo
Branded Client Portal App
$49/mo*
Dedicated IP Address
$59/mo
Domain Purchases
Varies based on domain and TLD
Email Validation
$2.50 per 1,000 validations
Online Listings
$30/mo
Premium Prospecting Tool
$29/mo
SEO (Powered by Search Atlas)
$79/mo*
WhatsApp Integration
$10/mo* and usage based
WordPress Hosting
$10-497/mo based on plan
Workflow - External AI Models
Varies based on model and usage
Workflow - Premium Features
$0.01 per execution
Workflow Pro Plan
$10-50/mo* based on plan
* Price is per enabled sub-account.
Ad Manager
Ad Manager is an easy, simple to use platform to create, manage and analyze paid ads ideal for growing your business by increasing its visibility and reach to the masses. Using Facebook Ads for you, Ad Manager can generate new leads with simple ad creation and seamless syncing of leads or increase traffic on your website.
Pricing: Ad Manager is free for all agencies, with no platform or subscription fees. Agencies can still resell Ad Manager to sub-accounts at any price they choose. Client ad spend is separate from Ad Manager platform pricing.
If you previously used Utility or Founder’s Ad Manager plans, you may still see those cards, but agency cost is now $0; existing client subscriptions continue until changed.
Clients with communities can buy their own branded mobile app to give their community members mobile access to the community. Your Clients can order this branded mobile app when they are logged in to your white labeled SourCherry app and fulfillment is provided by SourCherry. You can adjust how much this service is resold for.
Dedicated IPs offer a distinct advantage by sending your email messages from a unique, exclusive IP address. Getting a dedicated IP address provides your organization with exclusive ownership, giving you full control over the management of the email sender reputation and deliverability tied to that IP.
Pricing: $59/mo per dedicated domain. This feature is only available on the $297/mo and $497/mo plans.
Email Validation checks whether an email address is deliverable before you send an email. This helps agencies improve list quality and reduce failed, invalid, or risky email sends.
Pricing: Email Validation is available on all plan levels. SourCherry charges $2.50 per 1,000 email validations. Rebilling is available on the $297/mo and $497/mo plans.
Online Listings is an SEO tool that creates backlinks and helps ensure a client’s vital business information, such as address, operating hours, and phone number, is consistent across 70+ reputable websites. Agencies can use Online Listings as a client-facing local SEO service when resale is supported.
Pricing: Online Listings has three pricing options. Monthly Plan at $30/mo, Smart Saver Plan at $150 per 6 months, and Annual Advantage Plan at $300/yr.
SEO powered by Search Atlas helps agencies offer SEO tools and services to clients from within SourCherry. The feature supports keyword research, site audits, backlink analysis, content optimization, reporting, and local SEO tools.
WhatsApp is a messaging platform used by many to communicate. SourCherry directly integrates with WhatsApp, giving users the ability to unlock this popular messaging platform to capture, nurture, and close more leads.
Pricing: $10/mo per enabled sub-account.
In addition to this, Conversation and Template prices are charged based on usage. The usage prices vary by country and use case, see the WhatsApp Pricing Guide for more details on pricing.
Roughly 43% of all websites are built using WordPress. Within SourCherry, WordPress websites can be hosted and managed within a sub-account. While SourCherry hosts the WordPress site, users can still log into their WordPress Admin account to manage their website content as normal.
Pricing: The agency must choose a WordPress plan in Agency > Reselling before WordPress is available to clients.
Standard: $10/mo for 1 WordPress site ($108/yr)
Utility: $220/mo for 25 WordPress sites ($2,496/yr)
Truly Unlimited: $497/mo for unlimited WordPress sites ($4,968/yr)
If you want to increase specific parts of a plan or transfer existing WordPress sites between plans, contact Support directly.
Workflow - External AI Models allows agencies to use supported external AI models inside workflow automation. Charges are based on token usage, and word counts shown in SourCherry are estimates to help users understand expected usage. Actual charges may vary based on the selected model, input, output, and workflow activity.
Pricing: Pricing is usage-based and depends on the model used and token consumption.
Workflow - Premium Features includes supported premium workflow triggers (1) and actions (2) that extend automation capabilities beyond standard workflow steps. These premium workflow features may generate usage-based charges when they run in a workflow.
Pricing: $0.01 per execution.
Note that your agency is not charged for free triggers and actions, only for the premium triggers and actions in the sub-accounts beneath your Agency account.
Note: Some premium Workflow actions, such as ChatGPT, have different pricing.
Volume‑based pricing tiers for Workflows Premium Actions give every account—from side‑project creators to enterprise automation teams a lower entry point and more predictable scaling path. Four flexible tiers replace the single Pro Plan, this ensures that you get the most out of your premium executions with the best pricing in the industry
Pricing: Workflow Pro includes three paid tiers. The Starter Tier is $10/mo for the agency, the Growth Tier is $25/mo and the Scale Tier is $50/mo. Overage rates change based on the selected plan.
Tier
Monthly Price
Included Executions / mo
Overage Rate
Free
$0
100 free lifetime executions
$0.01 / execution
Starter
$10
10,000
$0.008 / execution
Growth
$25
30,000
$0.006 / execution
Scale
$50
65,000
$0.004 / execution
Note: Workflow Pro does not include ChatGPT or Workflow AI. Those executions are still billed pay-as-you-go.\n
Add-On Services are optional agency-level services, setup packages, support options, compliance upgrades, and white-label services. These are typically purchased by the agency to support its own operations, implementation needs, compliance requirements, or white-label experience.
Service
Pricing
Premium Support
$500/mo or $5000/yr
Whitelabel Mobile App
$497/mo or $1491/quarter
Whitelabel Zap
$50/mo
HL Certificate Program
$97/mo or $970/yr
Advanced Account Setup
$1000
HIPAA Compliance
$297/mo
Premium Support
Premium Support gives agencies access to enhanced support options beyond standard support channels. Depending on the current package, this may include faster response paths, dedicated technical account management, a private Slack channel, and quarterly business reviews.
The Whitelabel Mobile App allows agencies to offer a branded mobile app experience to clients or end users. This helps agencies strengthen brand presence while giving clients a dedicated mobile experience connected to their SourCherry tools.
The HL Certificate Program is an education-focused offering for users who want to build product knowledge, improve platform confidence, or validate SourCherry skills. This program is useful for agencies and team members who want structured training around SourCherry tools and workflows.
Advanced Account Setup is a done-with-you setup service for agencies that want expert help configuring their SourCherry account. It includes guided setup, consulting, and implementation support.
HIPAA Compliance supports agencies or clients that need additional compliance controls for protected health information workflows. SourCherry accounts are not HIPAA compliant by default. HIPAA Compliance is a paid upgrade that must be enabled for the agency and then configured for the required sub-accounts.
Pricing: $297/mo as an account-wide add-on. Agencies on any plan can subscribe to HIPAA Compliance. Once purchased and enabled, HIPAA Compliance cannot be deactivated.
Rebilling allows agencies to pass on-going costs to sub-accounts. Rebilling is commonly used for services such as Phone System usage, Email System usage and AI usage.
With rebilling, SourCherry charges the agency through the Agency Wallet first, and then the agency charges the sub-account for the usage it generated. This can be done at cost or with a markup.
Rebilling without markup is available on the $297/mo Unlimited plan and $497/mo Agency Pro planfor supported services, except where a product has separate requirements.
Rebilling without markup allows agencies to pass supported usage-based costs to sub-accounts at the same price SourCherry charges the agency. SourCherry charges the agency first through the Agency Wallet. When rebilling is enabled, the sub-account is then charged for the usage it generated.
Rebilling with agency markup is available on the $497/mo Agency Pro plan and is part of SAAS mode.
Rebilling with markup allows the agency to charge more than cost for supported services and keep the difference as profit. SourCherry still charges the agency first, but the sub-account is charged the agency’s marked-up price. This margin can be set in the Sub-Account Settings or in the SaaS Configurator.
For full setup steps, wallet flow examples, SaaS Mode behavior, and additional details, see How Rebilling Works.
Q: What is Reselling?
Similar to rebilling, reselling is offering one of our reselling services to a Sub-Account. Reselling is commonly used for services such as Online Listings, WhatsApp and the Branded Client Portal App. Unlike rebilling, which is usually tied to usage-based charges, reselling is typically used when an agency packages a SourCherry service as a product or subscription.
Agency owners will be charged the “SourCherry Price” by SourCherry for each Sub-Account that a feature is enabled for. However, they will be able to recover the cost, if they so choose, by enabling “re-sell” in-app. They can choose to offer it at the SourCherry Price or a higher re-sell price, allowing a profit to be generated.
The settings for these services can be found in the Agency View > Reselling
Q: What is an SMS Segment?
A segment is a portion of an SMS message used by carriers to send and calculate costs. Each SMS is divided into segments based on its length, with longer messages requiring multiple segments. Since charges are based on the number of segments, longer messages cost more. See What the Heck is a Segment by Twilio for a more in-depth explanation.
Q: Am I Charged for Unanswered Calls?
If you call someone and they do not pick up and you do not leave a voicemail - you are generally not charged for this call. Some restrictions may apply based on the outcome of the call and the type of call you are attempting.
Q: What are the differences between Basic and Advanced API Access?
Managing tasks efficiently is key to maintaining smooth business operations. The Task Completed Workflow Trigger in SourCherry helps automate follow-ups and next steps as soon as a task is marked as completed. This guide will walk you through its functionality, benefits, and step-by-step configuration.
The Task Completed Workflow Trigger is designed to automatically execute actions in a workflow whenever a task is marked as completed in the CRM. This ensures seamless automation of follow-ups, notifications, and process advancements, reducing manual effort and enhancing team productivity.
Key Benefits of the Task Completed Workflow Trigger
Automated Task Follow-Ups: Ensures the next steps happen automatically after a task is completed.
Enhanced Team Collaboration: Notifies assigned team members or other stakeholders about completed tasks.
Process Efficiency: Moves tasks forward in workflows without requiring manual intervention.
User-Specific Automation: Allows workflows to trigger based on the Assigned User filter.
Accurate Task Tracking: Keeps CRM data up to date with completed tasks.
Configuring the Task Completed Workflow Trigger
Accessing the Workflow Builder
Start by navigating to the Automation section in your SourCherry dashboard. If you’re setting up a new workflow, click + Create Workflow and then select + Start from Scratch. Alternatively, you can modify an existing workflow to include the Task Completed trigger.
Adding the Task Completed Trigger
To add the Task Completed trigger to your workflow, Click on + Add New Trigger and search for Task Completed in the available trigger list. Once found, select it to ensure the workflow initiates automatically whenever a task is marked as completed.
Applying the Assigned User Filter
To refine automation and ensure tasks are completed by specific team members, you can apply the Assigned User filter. This filter allows you to trigger workflows based on who completed the task.
After selecting the Task Completed trigger, choose the Assigned User filter and set the appropriate operator:
Is: The workflow triggers only when the selected user completes the task.
Is Empty: The workflow triggers if the task has no assigned user.
Is Not: The workflow triggers for all users except the selected one.
Is Not Empty: The workflow triggers when a task has an assigned user.
Once you choose an operator, the next dropdown will display all available CRM users, allowing you to select specific team members. If no filter is applied, the workflow will trigger whenever any user completes a task, ensuring flexibility based on your business needs.
Define Workflow Actions
After setting up the trigger, add workflow actions to automate the next steps.
Examples include:
Send Notification: Notify team members when a task is completed.
Update CRM Record: Modify contact or opportunity details after task completion.
Move Opportunity to the Next Stage: If the task is linked to a sales opportunity, advance it to the next stage.
Trigger Another Workflow: Activate another workflow based on task completion.
If you are looking for a detailed guide about using a specific workflow action, you can refer to the respective article in our Knowledge Base library.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I trigger workflows only for tasks completed by specific users?
Yes, use the Assigned User filter and select a team member using the “Is” operator.
Q: What happens if a task has no assigned user?
You can use the “Is Empty” filter operator to trigger workflows only for unassigned tasks.
Q: Can this trigger send automated notifications?
The trigger itself does not send notifications, but you can add a Send Notification action to alert team members.
Q: Can this workflow update an opportunity after task completion?
Yes, you can set an action to update the opportunity pipeline or status once a task is marked as completed.
Q: How do I check if the workflow is working properly?
You can track execution in the Workflow Execution Log to see if the trigger fires correctly when a task is completed.
This version now includes the correct filter operators and team member selection.
\n \n\n\n
",
"media": {
"images": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042034342/original/g5qw4injNkpmSYRFxrfnNtwlm9iHugRvMg.png?1740148687",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042034384/original/2vOEXiiM3_red78xpkaDpM34_hOSqB1HYA.png?1740148710",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042034421/original/RgmJIhW_ih4ZdJ9coSzQA4KPjKhiTu2o3Q.png?1740148745"
],
"gifs": [],
"videos": []
},
"internalLinks": [],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": false,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": true
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:24:24.603Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000001179",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000001179-how-to-sell-saas-in-currencies-other-than-usd-",
"title": "How to sell SaaS in currencies other than USD?",
"originalTitle": "How to sell SaaS in currencies other than USD?",
"slug": "how-to-sell-saas-in-currencies-other-than-usd",
"html": "\n
While setting up SaaS in currencies other than USD can be slightly more tedious, it is indeed possible. Many agencies have successfully expanded their SaaS business internationally. This article will guide you through a proven and scalable setup process.
Native support for selling SaaS sub-accounts in currencies other than the USD will be available soon. Until that time this workaround should work for all our SaaS agencies.
Can I sell SaaS in non-USD currencies?
Yes, you can. By following the workaround detailed in this document, our SaaS agencies can sell SaaS in almost any currency supported by Stripe.Click here to check which currencies Stripe supports based on your business country.
But when I create SaaS product they are always in USD. How can I change that?
Initially, create your SaaS products in USD using the SaaS Configurator.
Then login to your Stripe account and the products will look like this
Now edit the prices and change the currency in your desired currency. In this in example I will be using USD.
Now your Stripe products will be in the currency of your choice instead of USD. It should look like this
Repeat this process for all your SaaS products and prices.
My SaaS Configurator still shows USD. Is that a problem?
No, it's not. While the SaaS Configurator in your SourCherry agency view will continue to display products and prices in USD, the currency set in Stripe takes precedence. The currency onside Stripe overrides the currency in the SaaS Configurator.
How can I start selling SaaS in this new currency?
You can start by generating payment links for your SaaS products.
The checkout will then reflect your chosen currency instead of USD.
As you can see the checkout would be in the currency of your choice instead of USD.
What happens behind the scenes?
Upon checkout using your SaaS link, a customer profile is created in your Stripe account, along with an associated subscription, payment, and invoice (if no trial is offered)
The invoice and receipt will also be in your currency instead of USD.
But I want to use my funnel to sell this instead of Checkout links. How can I do that?
If you wish to use SourCherry funnels to sell your SaaS products instead of using the checkout link, then you can simply import these prices (the once we updated to your currency instead of USD) to that sub-account as shown below.
Make sure the Stripe account connected to your sub-account (location) that you'd use to sell your SaaS products is the same as the Stripe account connected to your agency.
You can check the Stripe account connected to a sub-account (location) by visiting Location Level -> left menu -> payments -> integrations
You can check the Stripe account connected to the agency by visiting Agency Level -> left menu -> Settings -> Stripe
Once you have validated that both Strip accounts are the same you can start importing your SaaS products in that sub-account (location).
How can I import my modified SaaS products and prices to the sub-account (location) I want to use for selling SaaS?
Head over to Location Level -> left menu -> payments -> products and click on \"Import from Stripe\" button. Then search for your SaaS product and click import.
Repeat this for all your SaaS products & prices. Your screen should look like this.
As you may notice all imported prices are in the currency of your choice instead of USD.
Yes, the sub-account credit charges (wallet recharges) will also be in the currency of your choice. However please keep in mind the usage will still be shown in USD.
The charge to your customers (invoices & receipts) will be in your currency.\n\nHowever, in the usage records (inside SourCherry -> Location level -> left menu -> settings -> company billing) usage will still show up in USD.
For example in this case, the user added US$ 100 to their credits. It shows up like this in their usage records
Behind the scenes, SourCherry automatically converts this amount (US$ 100) to your currency (AUD in this example) and runs the charge on Stripe in your currency. Thats why you would see the associated receipt to be in the currency of your choice.
There are several steps you can take to enhance the security of your SaaS checkout. These measures can help prevent phishing scammers from signing up and misusing your SaaS sub-account.
If you're currently using SourCherry funnels & websites for SaaS sales, it's advisable to switch to v2 funnels & websites. The newer version supports native Stripe integration and 3D secure technology, ensuring a more secure checkout experience.
Step 2 - Add Custom Authorization to your trial
Adding an authorization amount to your SaaS products with a trial is the best way to ensure only real credit cards with enough balance are able to get through your signup process.
You can enter an authorization amount on your sales funnel by going to funnel -> Products -> Additional Options -> Custom Authorization.
A Custom Authorization is especially helpful when your SaaS product has a trial. It sim ply creates a payment intent and validates that the card is real and has sufficient balance. The customer is NOT charged and the payment is refunded immediately.
Note\n- Custom Authorization does NOT charge the customer. It creates a payment intent and immediately refunds it\n- It's recommended to set the authorization amount equal to the monthly fee of your most basic plan.
Step 3 - Use LC Phone & LC Email
Using Twilio or Mailgun is risky for SaaS agencies because of latency in rebilling. This allows scam artists and bad actors to rack up your Twilio & Mailgun usage before the location credits are debited. This latency is caused by delays in usage records and webhooks that we receive from Twilio or Mailgun.
Using LC Phone & LC Email allows us to prevent that latency and also gives you access to additional security features like
Step 4 - Enable Phone Number & Email Verification by default
Boost the security of future SaaS signups by enabling Phone Number and Email Verification.
Email Verification is mandatory by default for all SaaS signups.
You can enable Phone Number verification for future SaaS signups by heading over to Agency Level -> Left Menu -> SaaS Configurator -> Security Settings -> Toggle : Verify Phone Number using a security code during sign-up
To enable email verification for all your existing sub-accounts please head over to Agency Level -> Left Menu -> Settings -> Email Services -> Sub-Account Settings -> Enable Email Verification for all sub-accounts
Step 5 - Use Stripe Radar
Stripe Radar is a fraud prevention suite integrated into the Stripe payment platform, utilizing machine learning algorithms trained on vast global data to detect and deter fraudulent transactions. It enables businesses to set custom rules to handle transactions based on specific parameters and provides detailed insights into flagged activities. Additionally, Radar offers features like adaptive acceptance, which dynamically requests added authentication for riskier payments, and a review dashboard for manual assessment. Integrated natively with Stripe, it offers a streamlined approach to online transaction security, reducing the need for third-party tools.
Stripe Radar is a paid product by Stripe but highly recommended for SaaS Agencies
Please log into your Stripe account and head over to Dasboard -> More -> Radar for Fraud Teams
Useful rules we recommend
You can add Radar rules by heading over to the rules tab
3D Secure Authentication Rules
These rules will allow the payment to go through if 3D Secure is authenticated
Block Rules
These rules will block they payment altogether
Review Rules
These rules will allow the payment to occur but they will be successful only if a human reviews and approves them
You can see all your pending reviews by heading over to the reviews tab in Radar. It looks like this
As an agency admin or owner you can approve or refund these payments manually.
FAQ:
Q: I followed these steps but a scammer was still able to signup. What do I do?
A: All the rules mentioned above are best practices and they will prevent your SaaS sub-accounts from being misused in most cases. However, some bad actors might still be able to get through in rare instances.
In such cases the best thing is to refund all fraudulent payments and specifically mark them as fraudulent.
When refunding the payment please select it as \"Fraudulent\". This is VERY IMPORTANT.
By refunding the payment and marking it as fraudulent Stripe Radar automatically gets smarter over time and prevents more scams from happening.
It automatically
Adds the card fingerprint to your blocklist
Adds the email ID to your blocklist
Sends various signals like IP, email, card number, etc to Stripe which makes it more accurate over time
Q: What is Funnel/Website v2 and how does it enhance security?
A: Funnel/Website v2 is an upgraded version of SourCherry funnels & websites. It supports native Stripe integration and 3D secure technology, which significantly improves the security of your SaaS checkout.
Q: What is Custom Authorization and how does it work?
A: Custom Authorization is a feature that allows you to add an authorization amount to your SaaS products with a trial. It ensures that only real credit cards with sufficient balance can sign up. The customer is not charged; instead, a payment intent is created to validate the card's authenticity and immediately refunded.
Q: Why should I consider using LC Phone & LC Email over Twilio or Mailgun?
A: Using Twilio or Mailgun can be risky due to latency in rebilling, which can be exploited by scammers. LC Phone & LC Email prevent this latency and offer additional security features like ramped usage, sending limits, and error rate monitoring.
Q: How can I enable Phone Number & Email Verification for my SaaS signups?
A: You can enable these verifications through the Agency Level settings. For phone number verification, navigate to Settings -> Phone Integration. For email verification, go to Settings -> Email Services.
Q: What is Stripe Radar and how does it help in fraud prevention?
A: Stripe Radar is a fraud prevention suite integrated into the Stripe payment platform. It uses machine learning algorithms to detect and deter fraudulent transactions. It allows businesses to set custom rules for transactions and provides insights into flagged activities.
Q: How can I set up rules in Stripe Radar for handling transactions?
A: You can add Radar rules by heading over to the rules tab in your Stripe account. There are different types of rules, such as 3D Secure Authentication Rules, Block Rules, and Review Rules, to customize how transactions are handled.
Q: What action should I take if a flagged payment appears in Stripe Radar?
A: If a payment is flagged in Stripe Radar, you can review it manually. As an agency admin or owner, you have the option to approve or refund these payments based on your assessment.
Seamless customer communication plays a vital role in business success, and managing inbound calls efficiently can significantly improve customer experience. An Interactive Voice Response (IVR) system helps automate call handling by guiding callers through pre-recorded prompts and directing them to the right department or action without human intervention. In this guide, we’ll explore how to configure an IVR system in SourCherry using workflows, whether through a prebuilt IVR recipe or by creating one from scratch.
An Interactive Voice Response (IVR) is an automated phone system that interacts with callers through pre-recorded messages, text-to-speech prompts, and keypad inputs. It allows businesses to guide callers to the right department, collect information, or provide self-service options without human intervention. In SourCherry, IVR is set up using workflows, enabling automated call routing and customer engagement.
To better understand how IVR works within workflows, refer to the table below, which outlines the key triggers, actions, and conditional logic used to build an IVR system.
IVR Component
Function
Use case
Trigger - Start IVR
Activates the IVR system when a call is received on a designated number.
A customer calls the business number, and the IVR workflow begins.
Action - Say/Play Message
Plays a recorded or text-to-speech message to guide the caller.
“Welcome to XYZ Company! Press 1 for Sales, Press 2 for Support.”
Action - Gather Input
Collects user keypress responses for navigation within the IVR menu.
Caller presses 1 for Sales, 2 for Support.
Condition - Map Caller Input
Directs the caller to the appropriate action or team based on input.
If 1 is pressed → Route to Sales Team, if 2 → Route to Support.
Action - Connect Call
Transfers the caller to a selected agent, department, or external number.
After pressing 1, the call is forwarded to a sales rep.
Action - Record Voicemail
Allows callers to leave a voicemail if no one is available to take the call.
If agents are unavailable, the IVR prompts the caller to leave a message.
Condition - Call Status Check
Determines what happens based on call outcome (answered, missed, or disconnected).
If unanswered, play a message and offer a callback option.
Key Benefits of IVR
Enhanced Call Management: Automatically directs callers to the appropriate team, reducing wait times and improving customer experience.
Improved Efficiency: Eliminates the need for manual call handling, freeing up staff for higher-value tasks.
24/7 Availability: Enables businesses to handle customer inquiries at any time, even outside business hours.
Customizable Interactions: Supports text-to-speech messages, call routing, voicemail collection, and data gathering based on caller input.
Seamless Workflow Integration: Works within SourCherry’s automation system to trigger actions like follow-ups, appointment scheduling, or lead categorization.
Configuring IVR Using Workflows
Setting up IVR in SourCherry can be done in two ways: using a workflow recipe for quick setup or creating one from scratch for full customization. Below, we explain both methods:
Method 1: Using the IVR Workflow Recipe (Faster Setup)
If you want a prebuilt IVR structure to save time, you can use the IVR Workflow Recipe, which includes predefined triggers, actions, and conditions.
Navigate to Automation from your SourCherry dashboard. Click Create Workflow, then click Select a Recipe option to quickly set up a preconfigured IVR system with minimal adjustments.
Selecting the IVR Workflow Recipe
Once inside the workflow creation section, use the recipe selection option to simplify setup. This recipe includes essential triggers, actions, and call routing logic, reducing the need for manual configuration. Select the IVR Workflow recipe and proceed to customize it based on your business needs.
Customize the Trigger
Phone Number: In the workflow trigger settings, select the phone number that will be used for the IVR system. This ensures that incoming calls are properly routed to trigger the IVR workflow. If the number is not correctly mapped, the IVR system will not function. Subsequent IVR actions will rely on this configuration to guide callers through the automated process. When you click the dropdown, It shows all the available phone numbers of the users. you can choose one or more phone numbers.
Say/Play Messages
Modify the text-to-speech or uploaded audio file in the workflow action settings to ensure the IVR delivers accurate and professional prompts to callers. This step allows you to customize greetings, menu options, and instructions for a seamless caller experience.
Call Routing Logic
Modify the input conditions within the IVR workflow to ensure callers are directed to the correct department or individual. Based on the keypress selections made by the caller, you can define specific routing paths, such as transferring calls to customer support, sales, or voicemail. This setup ensures an efficient and seamless caller experience. When you are done with the set up, Save and Publish the workflow to activate the IVR.
Method 2: Creating an IVR Workflow from Scratch (Full Customization)
For businesses with specific call routing needs, building an IVR system from scratch allows complete control over workflow design.
Step 1: Access Workflow Builder
Go to Automation in your SourCherry account and click on \"+ Create Workflow\" then click “Start from scratch\" This will open the workflow builder, where you can configure your IVR system either from scratch or by using a prebuilt IVR workflow recipe.
Step 2: Add the IVR Trigger
Click on ”+ Add New Trigger” in the workflow builder and search for “Start IVR” from the list of available triggers. Selecting this trigger will enable the IVR workflow to activate when a call is received on the assigned phone number. This is the first step in configuring an automated IVR system to handle incoming calls efficiently.
Step 3: Configuring Start IVR Workflow Trigger
Assigning a Phone Number
In the workflow trigger settings, select the phone number that will be used for the IVR system. Keep in mind that a phone number can only be assigned to one IVR workflow at a time. Once selected, click Save to confirm the configuration. This ensures that incoming calls to the assigned number will activate the IVR workflow.
Step 4: Configure IVR Actions
After adding the trigger, set up the actions to define how the IVR interacts with callers. Below are the available IVR workflow actions you can use for your workflow. In the next few steps, we will go through each IVR workflow action one by one.
Gather Input on Call Workflow Action
The Gather Input on Call action allows businesses to collect caller responses through keypad inputs, enabling seamless navigation within the IVR system. This action is essential for directing callers to the appropriate department, retrieving account information, or processing customer requests efficiently.
When setting up this action, you can configure the following options:
Say or Play Message:Choose how the IVR presents the message to callers:
Say Message: Type a text message that will be converted to speech.
Play Message: Upload a pre-recorded audio file for playback. Example, “Press 1 for account balance, Press 2 to speak with a representative.”
Text to Say: Enter the specific message you want callers to hear before making a selection. This ensures clear instructions are given for the available options.
Language & Message Voice: When using text-to-speech, the default language is US English. You can choose between a Male or Female voice to personalize the caller experience.
Number of Loops: Determines how many times the message will be repeated before the system stops waiting for a response. This helps ensure callers have enough time to understand and react to the prompt.
Match Conditions
The “Match Conditions” Toggle is used to define how the system processes caller input and directs them to the appropriate workflow path based on keypress responses. When Match Conditions is enabled, it allows you to create multiple branches based on different keypress inputs from the caller. Each branch represents a possible response, guiding the caller through specific actions based on their selection.
Components of Match Conditions:
Branch Name: A descriptive label for the keypress action. Example: “Caller Pressed 1” or “Caller Pressed 2”
On Key Press: Defines the key that a caller must press to follow a particular branch. Example: If the caller presses 1, they will be directed to one action; if they press 2, they will follow another action.
None Branch: Defines what happens if the caller does not press a valid key. Example: If the caller presses an invalid key (not 1 or 2), they can be routed to a default action, such as hearing the menu again or being redirected to a human agent.
Advanced Settings for Input Collection
Stop Gathering After (Seconds): Set the time limit for caller input, ranging from 5 to 30 seconds. If no input is received within this time frame, the system will proceed accordingly.
Stop Gathering on Key Press: If enabled, input collection stops immediately after the caller presses a key. If disabled, the system will wait until either the time limit is reached or the expected number of keypresses is collected.
Stop Gathering After (Digits): Specify how many digits the system should expect from the caller. Once this number is reached, the input is submitted automatically.
Say/Play Message Workflow Action
The Say/Play Message action allows businesses to provide instructions or important information to callers using either text-to-speech or a pre-recorded audio file. This action plays a crucial role in guiding callers through the IVR system by delivering automated messages before prompting them for input or directing them to the next step. This action ensures that callers receive clear instructions, whether through automated speech or recorded messages, improving the overall IVR experience.
When configuring this action, you can customize the following settings:
Say or Play Message: Choose between two options:
Say Message: Type a text message that will be converted into speech and played to the caller.
Play Message: Upload a pre-recorded audio file that will be played instead of text-to-speech.
Text or Audio File Input: Based on the selection above, you can either type the message directly into the provided text box or upload an audio file.
Recommended Format: For optimal performance, .wav files are recommended, as .mp3 files may not always be compatible.
Language Support: Currently, the default and only supported language for text-to-speech is US English.
Message Voice: When using text-to-speech, you have the option to choose from male voice and female voice.
Number of Loops: Set how many times the message should be repeated before proceeding to the next step. You can use the + and - buttons to adjust the repetition count, with the default being 1 loop.
Connect Call (IVR) Workflow Action
The Connect Call action allows businesses to seamlessly transfer an ongoing IVR call to a selected user, department, or external phone number. This ensures that callers are quickly connected to the right person or team for further assistance.
When setting up this action, you can configure the following options:
Connect Call To: Choose where to direct the call:
Select Users: Pick from existing users within your system to receive the call.
Add Custom Number: Input an external phone number if the call needs to be forwarded outside the organization.
Multiple Numbers: You can add up to 10 numbers, allowing calls to ring on multiple lines for increased availability.
Advanced Call Settings
Detect Voicemail: Enabling this feature determines whether the call was answered by a person or sent to voicemail. This helps prevent calls from being directed to voicemail boxes unnecessarily. Note: Enabling this may cause minor delays and could result in additional charges.
Record Call: Enable this option to automatically record the connected call for quality assurance or compliance purposes.
Timeout (Seconds): Set the maximum amount of time the system should wait for the recipient to answer the call before redirecting or ending it. The default is 10 seconds, but you can configure it between 1 and 600 seconds.
Time Limit (Seconds): Specify how long the connected call can last. By default, there is no time limit, but you can set a cap of up to 24 hours to ensure calls do not run indefinitely.
End Call (IVR) Workflow Action
The End Call (IVR) action is used to disconnect an ongoing IVR call. By default, the call will end immediately, but businesses have the option to provide a final message or play a custom sound before disconnecting. This ensures a smooth experience for callers, whether it’s a closing statement or hold music before the call ends.
Configurable Options
Add Voice Instructions: Allows you to play a message or sound before ending the call, giving callers a clear indication that the interaction is concluding.
Say or Play Message: Choose between two options:
Say a Message: Type a custom message that the system will convert into speech.
Play a Message: Upload an audio file (recommended format: .wav) to be played before disconnection.
Text to Say: If using text-to-speech, enter the message that will be spoken to the caller before the call ends.
Language: The IVR system currently supports English (US) for text-to-speech conversion.
Message Voice: Select the preferred voice for the text-to-speech feature. Available options: Man, Woman.
Number of Loops: Set how many times the message should repeat before the call disconnects. The default is 1, but you can increase this based on your needs.
Record Voicemail (IVR) Workflow Action
The Record Voicemail (IVR) action allows callers to leave voice messages when no one is available to answer. This feature is useful for businesses that want to capture important messages and ensure no customer inquiries are missed.
Configurable Options
Play Beep: Enables a beep sound to inform callers that voicemail recording has started. This helps provide clarity and confirmation that their message is being recorded.
Stop Recording After (Seconds of Silence): Defines the amount of silence (in seconds) before the system automatically stops recording. The default is 5 seconds, but this can be adjusted to any whole number based on preference.
Stop Recording on Keypress: Allows callers to manually stop the voicemail recording by pressing a designated key. Accepted key values include 0-9, * and #. By default, no key is set, meaning the recording will stop only after the silence threshold is reached.
Max Recording Length: Sets the maximum duration of the voicemail recording. The system allows a range between 1 and 14,400 seconds (4 hours), with the default set at 3,600 seconds (1 hour).
Add Voice Instructions: Provides an option to play a message before the voicemail recording begins. This can be a text-to-speech message or a pre-recorded audio file, ensuring the caller understands the purpose of the voicemail.
Implementing Conditional Branching (IF/ELSE Logic) in IVR Workflows
Conditional branching allows businesses to route calls dynamically based on user input, ensuring callers are directed to the appropriate department or action. This is achieved using IF/ELSE logic in the workflow, where different responses trigger different paths.
For example:
If a caller presses 1, the call is routed to Sales.
If a caller presses 2, the call is directed to Support.
If no input is received, the system can repeat the prompt or route to a default action.
Using Conditional Logic with IVR Gather
The IVR Gather action is responsible for collecting user input through keypress responses. Once a caller selects an option, the system processes that input and follows predefined logic to determine the next step.
Steps to Configure Conditional Logic in IVR Gather:
Add the IVR Gather Action: This prompts the caller to make a selection (e.g., “Press 1 for Service, Press 2 for Appointments”).
Set Up IF/Else Condition Logic: Using the “IF/Else Condition” action in the workflow, select IVR Gather as the condition source.
Define Key Press Responses
If Press 1, route the caller to a service details message.
If Press 2, route them to a live agent for booking.
Handle Unresponsive Calls: If no input is received, configure a fallback action such as repeating the prompt or sending the caller to voicemail.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: What happens if a caller ends the call during an IVR workflow?
If the caller ends the call at any point in the workflow, the contact will still move to the next step, but all IVR-specific actions (such as call transfers or voicemail recordings) will be skipped. Other workflow actions, such as tagging the contact or sending follow-up messages, will continue executing as configured.
Q: Can I use multiple phone numbers with the same IVR workflow?
No, each phone number can only be assigned to one IVR workflow at a time.
Q: Can I connect IVR calls to external numbers?
Yes, the IVR Connect Call action allows calls to be transferred to users within the system or external numbers.
Q: What happens if a caller doesn’t respond in time?
You can configure a timeout setting in the IVR Gather action to either repeat the prompt or redirect the call to a fallback action (e.g., voicemail).
Q: Where Can I Find the IVR Call Recordings?
All voicemail recordings are stored and can be accessed in the Conversations tab within SourCherry. This allows businesses to review, download, and manage voicemail messages efficiently.
Q: Are we able to perform a blind or warm transfer within an IVR call?
No. Currently, when an IVR call is routed to the web app, blind and warm transfers are not supported.
Q: Are we able to perform a blind or warm transfer within an IVR call? No. Currently, when an IVR call is routed to the web app, blind and warm transfers are not supported.
Now you can easily copy a workflow from one sub-account to another without going through the full \"Snapshot\" process. Only Agency Admin will be able to Copy Workflow.
Copy to Sub-Account
Select Sub-Account
Only the sub-accounts that the logged in user has access to will be listed here
On submit, the workflow will be copied to the selected sub-account
The workflow copied to other sub-account will be in draft state by default
Copy Workflow History
The history of workflows copied to another sub-account are listed with current status for each log
Copy Workflow History Details
If any error while copying, you can debug by clicking on that particular history to view detailed info
What happens to the assets while copying workflow?
The following assets in the workflow will be copied while copying a workflow to another sub-account:
Contact Tags
Contact Custom Fields (The field type should be same)
Sub-Account Custom Values
Opportunity Custom Fields
Opportunity Pipelines & stages
Email/SMS - text templates
Email builder templates (coming soon)
Note: All the other assets or references will be cleared/removed from the workflow before copying to the selected sub-account.
SaaS mode now allows you to restrict the number of users that can be added to sub-accounts.
The limit only applies to the number of sub-account level users that can be added. You can still add as many agency level users to the sub-account as you require.
Step 1: Go to the SaaS configurator. Select ‘Edit Details’ for the plan you need to set the user limit for.
Step 2: Go to the ‘Usage Limits’ tab. ‘User limit’ option can be found there.
Step 3: By default, unlimited users are allowed. Enable the User Limit toggle and set the desired limit for this plan.
Step 4: Select 'Save'.
The user limit is now set for the plan and any new sub-accounts that are created with/upgraded to this plan will have this limit applied to them.
Updating user limits for specific sub-accounts
Step 1: Go to the Sub-accounts page at the agency level. Select the sub-account you need to set the user limit for.
Step 2: Once you are on the ‘Manage Client’ page, navigate to the ‘Usage Limits’ section. User limits can be found there.
Step 3: Set/update the desired limit and select ‘Save’
The user limit that is set on the 'Manage Client' page overrides the limit of the subscribed plan for that sub-account. If the sub-account upgrades their plan, then the limit will also be reset according to their new plan.
SourCherry’s filtering tools help you find the right opportunities fast across busy pipelines. This guide explains filter types, operators, and common date presets so you can segment deals precisely.
Filtering narrows the list or board of opportunities to only those that match chosen conditions. By combining fields (like Owner, Status, or Date) with operators (such as is, is not, or greater than), teams can focus on the most relevant deals, speed up reviews, and reduce noise during pipeline management.
Key Benefits of Filtering Opportunities
Faster reviews: Quickly isolate deals by owner, stage movement, or recent activity.
Better prioritization: Focus on Open or recently updated opportunities to plan outreach.
Higher accuracy: Use operators (equals, not equals, empty, not empty) to avoid missed edge cases.
Deeper insights: Slice by value, source, and custom fields to analyze pipeline quality.
Cleaner workflows: Save time switching views by dialing in exactly what you need to see.
Filter Logic (AND/OR)
Logical operators determine how multiple conditions work together. Two types of filter conditional logic are possible: AND & OR.
Choose the logic that mirrors your question (narrow vs. broad).
AND - Every condition must be met for each opportunity
OR - At least one condition must be met for each opportunity
These filter conditions can be changed using the toggle on the top right of the filter right sidebar
Combine Owner = Person A AND Status = Open to focus a rep’s active deals.
Combine Status = Won OR Status = Lost to review closed outcomes only.
Note: Click Add nested filter to add an AND condition.\nClick Add Filter to add an OR condition.
Standard Filters Overview
Standard filters cover the most common CRM fields and actions. Use them to sort by responsibility, progress, value, and activity recency.
Owner: Select one or more owners, or use me to dynamically match the logged-in viewer.
Followers: Select one or more followers, or use me to dynamically match the logged-in viewer.
Status: Open, Won, Lost, Abandoned.
Opportunity Source: is, is not, is empty, is not empty (enter value as needed).
Campaign Type: Search and select a campaign type if used.
Opportunity Value: equal to, not equal to, less than, greater than, is empty, is not empty (enter numeric value).
Date-Based Filters
Date filters help you track recent changes and outcomes. Presets speed selection and keep reports consistent.
Last Stage Change Date: Is, Is Not, Yesterday, Today, This Week, Last Week, Last 7 Days, Last 30 Days, This Month, Last Month, This Year, Last Year, Custom, In the Next, In the Last, Less Than, More Than.
Last Status Change Date: Same presets as above.
Created On / Updated On: Same presets as above.
Opportunity Won On / Opportunity Lost On: Same presets as above.
Some date operators support relative time values. For example, you can set a condition like “In the next 10 days” or “In the last 2 weeks” or use a fixed date when needed.
Custom Fields & Tags
Organization‑specific fields power advanced segmentation. Any Opportunity Custom Field you add becomes available in filters with operators that match its data type.
Note: Checkout this article to learn more about CustomFields in Opportunities.
Examples: Client Type (is / is not buyer, seller, etc.), Efficiency Rating (=, ≠, <, >, empty / not empty), Favorite Pet (text/list), Tags (difficulty/type), Time Tracked.
Tip: Ensure field types are correct (number vs text) so the right operators appear.
How To Filter Opportunities
Note: By default, a pipeline has the opportunities filtered to show only the \"Open\" opportunities. If you are unable to find an opportunity, do ensure the correct filters and search is applied on the list.
Log in to your sub-account.
Go to Opportunities from the left sidebar.
Select the Pipeline you want to review.
Click Advanced Filter (funnel icon) beneath the Status area.
Choose your filters as needed:
Filter
Options / Fields
Owner & Followers
Owner, Followers (supports dynamic value: me)
Status
Open, Won, Lost, Abandoned
Opportunity Source
is, is not, is empty, is not empty
Campaign Type
Campaign Type
Date filters
Last Stage Change Date, Last Status Change Date, Created On, Updated On, Opportunity Won On, Opportunity Lost On (Presets: Yesterday, Today, This Week, Last Week, Last 7 Days, Last 30 Days, This Month, Last Month, This Year, Last Year, Custom)
Opportunity Value
equal to, less than, greater than, not equal to, is empty, is not empty
Q: Can I combine multiple filters? Yes. Add multiple conditions and choose AND or OR logic to narrow or broaden results.
Q: What’s the difference between Last Stage Change and Last Status Change? Stage tracks movement between pipeline stages; Status tracks lifecycle outcome (Open, Won, Lost, Abandoned).
Q: Which operators are available for value or numeric fields? A: Equal to, not equal to, less than, greater than, is empty, is not empty.
Q: Can I filter by deals I recently won or lost? Yes. Use Opportunity Won On or Opportunity Lost On and pick a date preset or custom range.
Adding, sharing, and requesting documents from contacts have never been easier. Documents aim to streamline the entire document management and sharing requirements for your business. Documents are broadly categories into 3 categories:
Store documents for your contacts within the CRM on the Contact details page. These documents can be accessed by users who have access to view the contact.
Documents added to custom fields are added to a Folder named \"Custom Fields\" in the \"Internal\" section. Documents in custom fields are non deletable
Adding Documents to your Contacts
Add new documents to the internal section by hitting \"+Add\" -> \"New File\"
- The max size limit per document is 250MB\n- Document types supported = PPT, Docs, PDF, CSV, and various image formats
Searching for the Documents
Search documents based on the Document Name in the contact details page
The Contact Engagement Score is a metric that helps businesses track, prioritize, and engage with leads based on their level of interaction. By assigning scores to actions like email opens, form submissions, and purchases, businesses can focus on high-score leads ready for conversion while nurturing low-score leads to improve engagement. In this article, you’ll learn how to set up engagement scoring, where to view scores in the platform.
The Contact Engagement Score is a numerical value that tracks how actively a contact interacts with a business. Each interaction impacts the score based on predefined rules. Positive actions like link clicks or payments increase the score, while negative actions like email bounces or unsubscribes reduce it. This ensures the score accurately reflects a contact’s engagement level.
By assigning points to actions like email opens, form submissions, and purchases, businesses can prioritize high-value leads while identifying those needing more nurturing.
Where to View Contact Engagement Scores
Users can access engagement scores in different sections of the platform to quickly gauge a contact’s level of interaction. Below are the two primary locations where these scores can be found.
Contacts Section
Inside an individual contact’s profile within the Contacts section, you need to scroll down to find the Contact Engagement Score dropdown among other details.
Conversations Section
In the Conversations section, you can see the engagement score of the contact you are actively communicating with. As shown in the screenshot, the score can be viewed and edited from the \"Contact Enagement Score\" dropdown at the right hand side.
Understanding Action Types in Engagement Score Rules
When setting up a new engagement score rule in Manage Score, you have multiple options as an action type that determines when the rule is triggered. Below is a breakdown of all available action types and how they can be used to track engagement effectively.
Email Events: When a contact interacts with an email, like opening it or clicking a link, their engagement score can increase, making it easier to track who is actively engaging with your emails and who might be interested in your offers.
Contact Changed: If a contact’s details change, such as when a custom field is updated, their engagement score can be adjusted accordingly, helping businesses track engagement based on profile updates, like when a lead moves from “New” to “Qualified.”
Contact Tag: Adding or removing a contact tag can also impact the engagement score, so if a contact is tagged as a “VIP Customer”, they might receive additional points, allowing businesses to prioritize engaged and high-value customers.
Payment Received: Whenever a payment is received, engagement points can be added to reflect a higher level of interaction, making it easy to differentiate between leads who are just browsing and those who have made a purchase.
Contact Replied: If a contact replies to a message, whether it’s an email, SMS, or chat, their engagement score can increase, helping businesses identify which contacts are actively responding and are more likely to convert.
Form Submitted: Submitting a form, like a lead generation or contact request form, can add points to a contact’s engagement score, allowing businesses to track which leads are showing strong interest and may need a follow-up.
Order Form Submission: When a contact submits an order form, it’s a sign that they are interested in making a purchase, so adding engagement points can help businesses identify sales-ready leads.
Order Placed: If a contact places an order, their engagement score can increase, making it easy to track customers who have gone beyond interest and taken action by purchasing a product or service.
Survey Submitted: Submitting a survey can also be a sign of engagement, so awarding points when a contact provides feedback helps recognize those who are actively participating and providing valuable insights.
Trigger Link Clicked: Clicking on a trigger link, such as a promotional or special offer link, shows interest in specific content, so adding points can help track contacts who engage with key calls to action.
Appointment Booked: When a contact books an appointment, like scheduling a demo or consultation, it’s a strong sign of intent, so increasing their engagement score can help businesses prioritize follow-ups with contacts who are ready to take the next step.
Appointment Status Changed: Appointment status changes, such as confirmations or cancellations, can also affect engagement scores, helping businesses track which contacts follow through on scheduled meetings and which ones might need a reminder or re-engagement.
How to Set Up and Manage Score
Score rules define how points are assigned based on contact interactions, helping businesses measure engagement effectively. In this section, you’ll learn how to create, customize, and manage score rules. Keeping these rules updated ensures that engagement tracking stays accurate and useful.
Access Manage Scoring Menu
To get started, head over to Settings > Manage Scoring menu. This is where you’ll find all the existing scoring rules and have the flexibility to create new ones.
Draft vs. Publish Toggle
The Draft Mode allows you to make changes to engagement scoring rules without affecting live data. This is useful when setting up new rules or making adjustments before applying them to contacts. Once ready, switching to Publish Mode makes the score system active for all contacts, ensuring engagement tracking is updated in real-time.
+ Add New Rule Button
Clicking the + Add New Rule button allows you to create custom engagement rules based on specific actions. This helps you tailor the engagement scoring to fit your needs by defining which interactions contribute to or reduce a contact’s score.
Scoring Rules Table
The Scoring Rules Table displays all existing engagement score rules, helping you track and modify your engagement tracking setup.
Action Column: This column lists the conditions that trigger score adjustments, such as “if an email is opened” or “if a contact books an appointment.”
Calculation Column: Shows how many points are added or subtracted based on the selected action.
Three-Dot Menu (⋮) for Each Rule: Each rule includes a three-dot menu that allows users to edit or delete existing rules. This ensures flexibility in modifying scoring criteria as engagement strategies evolve.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q. Can I apply different engagement score rules to different contact segments or lists?
Yes, but not directly within the Manage Score section. Engagement scoring applies to all contacts globally. However, you can create smart lists or use tags and custom fields to segment contacts and apply engagement-based workflows that trigger different actions based on specific criteria.
Q. Does the engagement score automatically decrease over time if a contact stops interacting?
No, SourCherry’s engagement score does not include an automatic score decay feature. If you want scores to decrease for inactive contacts, you’ll need to set up an automation workflow using timed triggers that subtract points when a contact hasn’t interacted within a certain period (e.g., no email opens or replies in 60 days).
Q. Can I assign different weightings to the same action based on different conditions?
Currently, the Manage Score section does not support condition-based weightings for the same action. However, you can create multiple rules for similar actions with different triggers. For example, you can assign +5 points for clicking a regular email link but +10 points for clicking a high-priority promotional link using different trigger conditions.
Q. How does the engagement score affect automated workflows, and can I trigger multiple workflows based on score changes?
Yes! Engagement scores can be used as workflow triggers in the Automations section. You can create workflows that launch when a contact’s score crosses a threshold (e.g., greater than 20) to trigger sales outreach, email sequences, or nurture campaigns. Multiple workflows can be triggered based on different score levels to automate lead qualification and engagement strategies.
Q. Can I track historical engagement score changes to see how a contact’s engagement evolves over time?
Currently, SourCherry does not provide a built-in historical log for engagement score changes. However, you can work around this by logging engagement score changes in a custom field or using an automation workflow to store score snapshots at regular intervals. This allows you to track engagement trends and analyze how a contact’s interaction level changes over time.
This article explains how to set up and use Contact Types in SourCherry to better segment and manage your contacts. Contact Types are dropdown fields that help define what kind of relationship you have with a contact, such as “Lead,” “Client,” or “Prospect.”
Contact Type is a customizable dropdown field used to define the role or status of a contact in your system. It helps with segmentation, targeting, and automation. You can assign Contact Types manually or dynamically through workflows.
When creating a new contact, Contact Type is a mandatory field, requiring the user to select from predefined dropdown values. Each contact can have only one Contact Type at a time, which makes this field ideal for high-level segmentation based on relationship status or lifecycle stage.
Key Benefits of Contact Types
Organizing your contacts by type enables better segmentation, automation, and targeting in your campaigns. This section outlines the main advantages.
Simplify segmentation and filtering of contacts
Automate marketing and nurturing flows based on contact status
Enables targeted Smart Lists for email, SMS, and workflows
Easily customizable to fit any business or agency model
Works seamlessly with other organizational tools like tags and categories
How To Set Up Contact Types
Learn how to add, edit, or delete Contact Types through the Custom Fields section. This is where you configure the labels that define each type.
Navigate to Settings > Custom Fields
Locate the Contact Type custom field
Check the box next to Contact Type. Click the blue Bulk Actions button then choose Edit from the dropdown.
Add, rename, or delete options like “Lead,” “Client,” “Cold Prospect”
How To Assign a Contact Type
You can assign Contact Types while creating or editing a contact or dynamically using workflows. Here's how to do it.
Manual Assignment:
Navigate to the Contacts tab
Click on the desired contact
Click the ContactType dropdown and choose the contact type
Assign via Workflow:
Add an Update Contact Field action to a workflow
Add a field and select Contact Type. Then select the desired contact type
Filtering Contacts by Type
Segmenting your contact list by Contact Type helps you send targeted messages and build Smart Lists for automation.
Go to Contacts > Smart Lists
Click More Filters then select Type
Choose a Contact Type to filter by
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Can I have multiple Contact Types on one contact? No. Contact Type is a single-select dropdown field. Use Tags for multi-labeling.
Q: Can I use Contact Type as a trigger in workflows? Yes. Use the Contact Changed trigger to fire automations when the Contact Type is updated.
Q: Can I rename or delete a Contact Type after it’s in use? Yes. Renaming or deleting values will update them across all contacts.
Q: Can I bulk update Contact Types for multiple contacts at once? Yes. You can use the bulk action feature in Smart Lists to apply the “Update Contact Field” action to multiple selected contacts and set a new Contact Type for all of them.
The Template Library is a collection of libraries with templates for specific products (email, funnels, etc). Agency Admins can add custom templates to the library(s).
Template Library Permissions - To add templates to the Template Library the agency must be on the $497/mo Pro plan.\n- Template Library must be toggled on in Agency Account > Settings > Company > Template Library for Clients - Users must have Agency Admin permissions to upload templates.
Add a Custom Template
Step 1: Navigate to the correct Product
The Template Library is one function but to reduce confusion the Template Library only shows items from one Product at a time.
Marketing Products
If you want to add a Social Planner post as a template, navigate to Marketing > Social Planner > Content tab > CSV tab. Click on the 3-dot action menu next to the item you want to turn into a template and click Upload to social templates.
For Email Templates, which are also called Templates (so they're Template Templates), navigate to Marketing > Emails > Templates tab > find the one you want then click the 3-dot action menu and Upload to email templates.
Automation Products
If you want to add a Workflow as a template, navigate to Automation > Workflows > find the one you want and click the 3-dot action menu and select Upload to Template Library.
Sites Products
If you want to add a Funnel, Website, Store, Blog, Email, Form, Survey, or Quiz as a template, navigate to Sites > [product] > find the one you want and click the 3-dot action menu and select \"Upload to [product] templates\".
Step 2: Name and Categorize the Template
In the new modal titled \"Upload to [product] templates\" type a display name for the template and add it to a category. When you are satisfied, click Upload.
Step 3: Edit Template in Admin Mode
You will be taken to the admin mode to edit all of the library settings for the [product] template. You can edit:
Name
Category
Preview
Cover image: Upload a thumbnail or preview image to visually represent the template.
Tags: Add searchable tags that help users quickly find your template (ex: New Years).
Prerequisites: Specify requirements to use the functions in the template (ex: Stripe, email domain).
Short Description: This is a quick summary that appears in the preview card of the Template Library.
Long About: Everything else: detail use cases, content tips, or setup instructions, etc. This section supports basic formatting, so you can include feature highlights, usage instructions, or best practice tips. Think of it as a mini overview that helps users decide how and when to use the template.
Step 4: Publish
Once the template is ready, click Publish Template to make it public (this will make the template visible in subaccounts to be used by subaccount clients).
The Subaccount clients will see the custom template like all other templates in their template library.
The Agency will also see the custom template like other templates, but will have more options.
Frequently Asked Questions
Who can add or edit templates details in the Template Library?
Only users with the Agency Admin role can add and manage templates.
Is adding Custom Templates available on all plans?
The option to add and manage custom Templates is only available on the $497/mo pro plan.
If there are any updates in template added to template library, what happens?
Changes made to the original source of the template will not flow through to the template in the Template Library.
Can we hide/edit Templates already present in Template Library?
The individual templates cannot be hidden, but Categories can be hidden, so if you add a template to only one Category, and that Category is hidden, then the Template will not appear in any Subaccount's view of the Template Library.
SaaS mode now allows you to restrict the number of contacts that can be created in a sub-accounts.
The contact limit is NOT A COMPLETE LIMIT, i.e. more contacts can still be created in the sub-account via APIs, Forms, Workflows etc. even after the limit has been exhausted. That said, users won't be able to create more contacts from the UI, i.e. manually creating contacts or importing contacts in bulk.
Step 1: Go to the SaaS configurator. Select ‘Edit Details’ for the plan you need to set the contact limit for.
Step 2: Go to the ‘Usage Limits’ tab. ‘Contact limit’ option can be found there.
Step 3: By default, unlimited contacts are allowed. Enable the Contact Limit toggle and set the desired limit for this plan.
Step 4: Select 'Save'.
The user limit is now set for the plan and any new sub-accounts that are created with/upgraded to this plan will have this limit applied to them.
Updating contact limits for specific sub-accounts
Step 1: Go to the Sub-accounts page at the agency level. Select the sub-account you need to set the contact limit for.
Step 2: Once you are on the ‘Manage Client’ page, navigate to the ‘Usage Limits’ section. Contact limits can be found there.
Step 3: Set/update the desired limit and select ‘Save’.
The contact limit that is set on the 'Manage Client' page overrides the limit of the subscribed plan for that sub-account. If the sub-account upgrades their plan, then the limit will also be reset according to their new plan.
\n \n\n\n
",
"media": {
"images": [
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010764886/original/9ayXK3MedkuT1JLB-SkJA1drKLS23k_OiA.png?1698039994",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010764973/original/XYMTEIaE2CoMjoinK8n0zqTgZjMVwGzaOA.png?1698040210",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010785820/original/uCVkxCo-szCIBK7iYGasO_UpIPy1uPrwOw.png?1698052937",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010786045/original/Gys-OwLlTxGNc4YWEu9JZFN1BlFdwO1Y7A.png?1698053005",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010786577/original/X-bSyRKJ8wWXkyK2zGP8yV0gGO9m5LCW9w.jpeg?1698053213",
"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010786960/original/7zXxbMG0Ych7IuonVWaThtf4mqJqmMNrCw.png?1698053393"
],
"gifs": [],
"videos": []
},
"internalLinks": [],
"flags": {
"hasVideo": false,
"hasGif": false,
"screenshotsNeedReview": true
},
"scrapedAt": "2026-07-21T13:34:17.503Z",
"persian": null
},
{
"id": "155000001314",
"sourceUrl": "https://help.gohighlevel.com/support/solutions/articles/155000001314-conditional-logic-v2-in-forms-and-surveys-",
"title": "Conditional Logic V2 in Forms and Surveys!",
"originalTitle": "Conditional Logic V2 in Forms and Surveys!",
"slug": "conditional-logic-v2-in-forms-and-surveys",
"html": "\n
\n
\n
\n \n\n \n
\n \n
\n
\n
\n
Conditional Logic v2 helps you create smarter, more dynamic forms and surveys. It lets you show or hide fields, redirect users, display messages, disqualify leads, or jump to different slides — all based on how someone answers.
This guide explains how to use Conditional Logic, what’s new in version 2, and which fields are supported.
What Is Conditional Logic
Conditional Logic automates actions inside a form or survey based on user input. You can define conditions like:
If the answer is “No,” show a message.
If the score is below 5, disqualify the lead.
If the date is within a range, redirect to another page.
In surveys, jump to a specific slide instead of showing all questions.
This creates a more personal and efficient experience for respondents.
Expanded Field Support: Checkboxes, multi-dropdowns, TnC1, TnC2, file uploads, and signatures
New Show/Hide Targets: Payment, text, HTML, image, and TnC elements
Rule List Filtering (Surveys): Filter rules by field or slide
Cycle Protection: Prevents loops (Slide A → Slide B → Slide A)
Localized & Accessible: Translated UI with keyboard navigation
Available Actions
When you open Conditional Logic, you’ll see four action types you can create:
Action
Description
Redirect to URL
Send users to a specific webpage after submission
Display Custom Message
Show a personalized message based on answers
Disqualify Lead
Automatically reject unqualified form submissions
Show/Hide Fields
Dynamically control which fields appear or hide
All conditions are executed in top-down order. Later matching rules override earlier ones when applicable.
Conditional Logic in Calendar Booking Forms
Conditional logic in forms also applies when a custom form is used inside a supported calendar booking flow. This gives you more control over qualification and the final confirmation experience.
In calendar bookings:
Show/Hide logic updates fields dynamically as the user answers questions
Disqualify lead logic is checked before the appointment is booked
If a lead is disqualified, the system does not create the appointment
If a lead is disqualified, the system does not collect payment
Redirects and custom messages can be used as part of the booking outcome
If the calendar confirmation page is set to Use custom form rules, the system shows the form’s redirect or custom message after submission. If the form does not include either one, the booking uses the default confirmation page instead.
Note: Calendar support described here applies to supported booking flows that use custom forms. Services (v2) and Rentals are not included in this article yet.
How to Set Up Conditional Logic
You can add and manage rules directly inside the Form or Survey Builder.
1. Open Conditional Logic
In the builder, click Conditional Logic in the top bar.
2. Add a New Condition
Click Add New Condition.
Choose an action (Redirect, Message, Disqualify, or Show/Hide).
The logic builder opens for that action.
3. Build the Rule
Follow the guided 3-step flow:
Select Field – Choose the form field or slide to base the rule on.
Select Field State – Pick the condition (e.g., is equal to, is empty).
Provide a Value – Enter the matching value (text, number, or date).
You can add additional conditions using AND or OR connectors.
Some operators don’t require values, like “is empty” or “is checked.”
4. Choose the Action Result
Depending on the action type:
Redirect: Add a valid URL (e.g., https://example.com)
Display Message: Enter your message text
Show/Hide Fields: Pick which fields appear or hide
Disqualify Lead: The form stops submission when matched
Jump To (Surveys only): Choose the target slide or question
5. Save
The Save button activates only after all required inputs are valid.
The system checks for missing values and prevents loops automatically.
Rules run top-down, and later matches override earlier ones.
Supported Fields
Conditional Logic v2 supports more field types than before.
Personal Info
First Name
Last Name
Email
Phone
Form Fields
Single Line
Multi Line
Number
Monetary
Score
Date Picker
Dropdown (Single)
Dropdown (Multi)
Radio Select
Checkbox
Terms & Conditions (TnC1 / TnC2)
File Upload
Signature
Content & Payment Elements
Text
HTML
Image
Payment
Note: Calendar fields are not yet supported.
Supported Operators by Field Type
Field Type
Operators
Text (single/multi line)
equal to, not equal to, contains, does not contain, starts with, ends with, is empty, is filled
Phone / Email
equal to, not equal to, contains, starts with, ends with, is empty, is filled
Number / Score / Monetary
equal to, not equal to, greater than, less than, between, is empty, is filled
Date
equal to, before, after, between, is empty, is filled
Dropdown (single)
is equal to, is not equal to, is empty, is filled
Multi Dropdown / Checkbox
is equal to {Option}, is not equal to {Option}, is empty, is filled
TnC1 / TnC2
is checked, is not checked
File Upload / Signature
is empty, is filled
Survey-Specific Features
Jump To Logic
IF Basis: Field or Slide
THEN Action: Jump to a slide or question
Evaluation: Happens when the user clicks “Next”
Conflict Handling: If multiple Jump To rules match, the first one runs
Protection: Prevents self-loops and slide-to-slide cycles automatically
Rule Filtering
In surveys, you can filter rules by:
Field: Show all rules related to a field
Slide: Show all rules that affect or belong to that slide
Behavior & Evaluation
Rules execute top-down in order.
For Redirect, Message, Disqualify, only the first matching rule runs.
For Show/Hide, later matches override earlier ones.
For multi-selects, “is equal to {Option}” checks if the option is selected.
Text logic ignores case and extra spaces.
Dates use the account’s timezone.
Tips
Use Between for number or date ranges (inclusive).
Try date presets like Today or This Week.
The “Radio Other” option appears only if enabled for that field.
Always preview the form or survey to verify rule behavior.
FAQs
1. Can I mix AND and OR in the same rule? No. Each rule must use one type of connector — either AND or OR.
2. Can I have multiple rules in the same form? Yes. Each rule works independently.
3. What happens if more than one condition matches? For submission actions, the first match wins. For Show/Hide, later rules override earlier ones.
4. Can I create loops in Jump To logic? No. The builder prevents loops and shows an error message if detected.
Launch polished, on‑brand Forms and Surveys faster with Themes in SourCherry. Themes are ready‑made presets that apply a cohesive design in a single step. This article explains how to apply and customize themes for your forms and surveys.
Themes in the Form and Survey Builder bring extensive customization options, allowing you to choose from a variety of professionally crafted themes to match your brand's identity. With user-friendly controls and real-time previews, you can easily create visually stunning and responsive forms. These themes streamline the design process, saving you time and ensuring a consistent and professional look across multiple forms. Regular updates to the themes library keep your forms on the cutting edge of aesthetics.
Key Benefits of Themes in Forms and Surveys
Consistency: Creates a cohesive look across the entire asset with one selection.
Speed-to-Launch: Reduces setup time by starting from a polished preset.
Responsive by Default: Automatically adapts to mobile, tablet, and desktop for a consistent experience.
Real‑Time Previews: Validate changes instantly before publishing or embedding.
How to Apply a Theme to a Form or Survey
Open your Form or Survey in the builder.
Click Styles & Options (top‑right) to open the Right Sidebar.
Select the Themes tab and choose your preferred Theme.
How to Customize a Theme
After selecting a Theme, refine brand colors and imagery in Styles & Options → Styles → Colors & Backgrounds.
Button Themes (Gallery & Live Preview)
Button Themes provide curated presets—Filled, Border, and Text Only—that apply best-practice color, typography, and spacing. Start with a theme for speed, then refine with the Button Styling Panel to maintain brand consistency.
Customize After Applying a Theme
Close the gallery to return to the Button Styling Panel.
Use Colors & Background, Typography, Layout & Alignment, Padding, Border & Corner Radius, and Shadow to refine the look.
Toggle Full Width if needed.
Branding & Color Tokens
Confirm how Primary Color maps to button fill, border, and text for your chosen theme (Needs Confirmation).
Adjust colors to meet accessibility contrast guidelines.
Consistency Across Assets (Conditional)
If button themes are reusable across Forms/Surveys, apply the same theme across assets to standardize CTAs.
If themes are per asset, repeat the apply/customize steps on each form or survey.
Revert or Try Another Theme
Open Select Themes to switch presets, or use Reset/Revert in the panel to undo changes.
Adjust Colors
Use these settings to adjust the background, text input and input border colors to match your branding.
Change the Background Image
If your selected Theme includes a default background image, remove it first. The upload control remains disabled until the default is deleted. Then click below Background Image to upload your file.
New default theme experience
The default theme for Forms, Surveys, and supported Quiz components now has a refreshed look and feel.
This update improves the out-of-the-box appearance with cleaner spacing, more polished inputs, rounded styling, and better visual consistency across supported elements.
You will also see clearer empty states and more consistent styling for labels, placeholders, images, footer colors, and chips.
Frequently Asked Questions
Q: Why is the \"Upload New Background\" button disabled? Delete the Theme’s default background image first. The upload option becomes available once the existing image is removed.
Q: Can I reuse the same Theme across multiple assets? Apply the Theme per asset. To keep multiple Forms/Surveys consistent, choose the same Theme and mirror your Styles settings.
You can now tailor your survey footer by customizing themes, background, font, height, progress bar, button color, and position, allowing it to align seamlessly with your brand identity. Choose from various themes, including progress bars, and enjoy real-time previews for instant feedback. The footer can also stick to each slide, ensuring a smooth user experience. New surveys will have these customization options enabled by default, while existing surveys can be upgraded to benefit from the enhanced footer features.
Access the Survey Builder: Log in to your survey creation platform or tool.
Open or Create a Survey: You can either open an existing survey or create a new one.
Navigate to Footer Customization: Look for \"Style\" tab within the Survey Builder interface.
Enable the new footer.
Please note that if you're creating a new survey, the new footer customization options may be enabled by default. For existing surveys, the default old footer will be retained, but you may have the option to toggle on the new footer customization options for an upgraded look and feel, depending on the survey builder's settings.
What are the customizaiton option in the new footer ?
Following are the customization option:
Themes: You can choose from different themes to change the overall look and feel of the footer. Themes may include various color schemes, fonts, and styles.
Background: Customize the background of the footer, which may include selecting a background color, image, or pattern.
Font: Adjust the font style and size used for the text in the footer.
Height: Modify the height of the footer to make it taller or shorter based on your preferences.
Progress Bar: Customize the appearance of the progress bar, including its color, style, and positioning.
Button Color: Choose the color for buttons within the footer, such as \"Next\" or \"Submit.\"
Position: Define the placement of the footer within the survey, which could be at the bottom, top, or other designated positions.
Stick to Survey: Enable the footer to stick to the slide as respondents progress through the survey, ensuring a seamless and consistent experience.
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155053555932/original/omypVzpD4ZIFIAoXgerZHkjna_VbAoHDZQ.png?1757587829\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155053555971/original/BzX61Sff9VPH5IMu3UyqRuZVxlLfb7ASwQ.png?1757587862\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062250747/original/pVWeK4yDfAHpD4YrPxpNU_mtq4uCO-_baw.jpeg?1767888777\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155053553965/original/1jHn9-YOPznYisf4_S9772eWc4kkWtdzgw.png?1757586746\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000318313/original/CdbUV4IqS1HJ_BfgCsqAOrDLVhYquft4Yw.png?1685694447\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032158961/original/xOKS56ChQcV_2TRh8N1uMS4pVPuPgVBR2w.jpg?1725368458\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155064517654/original/nnSSWYJzNzkDkTY6ZO_6A9lMVV6O7iY--g.jpeg?1770654574\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155064517682/original/vmzop5xevXIbJwOS03W9x9T-LuDwIJjrxg.jpeg?1770654593\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000346953/original/444pNqULIDUFye0-RUKRqHR9gYh5ufctkw.png?1685713319\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032199341/original/VyblHXCJa25m1k5AyhUi3hLCytJwv_enxA.png?1725427110\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032200136/original/lzHb643sHNx4Sd3xBf0LJn5h1yigqEJhRw.jpg?1725428873\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032200558/original/oEOU071NTDFoqp1Iiu1jdKKJ1z9CDYg0pQ.png?1725429501\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000348753/original/0ce6bWB7_Rm79QiHDGhdfR7oDtEGq0ELBg.png?1685714349\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000348775/original/3E-xZM3y9yHfOA5XR9nDSL3R7GZbdU_E4Q.png?1685714364\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032201550/original/N0g731qMizXMi-QhxR1tqZwRUg83i1eIVg.jpg?1725430697\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155064548810/original/pAYsP55vZ_Uu3z4cNnBptUvviccM6pBQ_Q.png?1770710865\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000350397/original/6V5iTscJ-FxQ-PhxDD4BllEydRiK07y0fg.png?1685715704\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032203327/original/Dp3duVkRbfvT9h8sacRXSBq6E6Jpn5PTgg.jpg?1725432262\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/kYtmv6GLLOVU3mU1dAEF+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-09+at+10.20.52+PM.png\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000352270/original/FoW90aoQ7s2aNo1N77LXlKdAAKRz92OyTg.png?1685717171\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032203569/original/YHWh9xVr4056iflR29SJaMX8bDtb1qVF_A.jpg?1725432539\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000355754/original/OAqzqxv2N193IKidWKf7jJNKbEwI046now.png?1685719574\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032203929/original/o7LvakytDSm5YIiSdezYzVs_Clq1GzZ8ZQ.jpg?1725432834\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000366980/original/I8-suzLj0ciFDn4J-wwsA8DnAea7yib-_Q.png?1685734315\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032204096/original/SkZSwUQc4YuVe0830Ro20_w4KcYgbVqu7A.jpg?1725432966\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000367252/original/yC0oEmBKDLF2L49A9DG1IvivOUzpfcBIKg.png?1685735208\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000367255/original/E8Ajm0--lmvE-LDjRsT67Okq2hJZG4fbwQ.png?1685735215\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000367283/original/p-LoL9bxbUTDuCFcYZBfUhLyq5Jo-Vd24Q.png?1685735283\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032204264/original/AvFqthftVzQ75UlIk7xtPnMp_n8Bd0E0Og.jpg?1725433124\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000367318/original/qXhlqMqV0wHc3GbUJrkKJCF_xEgcQMdQrQ.png?1685735372\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032204502/original/8CJFhfpjebOb3Il0fEwoD4hfDLCQG3kBgw.jpg?1725433299\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000367385/original/rRmv-SVDKBIg7IL4acN83y3pI5ggciO17w.png?1685735522\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032205316/original/DfXqtBDF0ilubAIrfO16QWX-4aiSodILQQ.jpg?1725433785\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000367932/original/KXeCwwcrr1bgCt_nLQJ3g50ATWIIHanFsw.png?1685736584\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032205940/original/_96BZyio3yxd3Q_msbfuSPIYEhlyUojrzA.jpeg?1725434221\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032207212/original/4-WB9TAnba3BSw9GY3aoKmSS6YG4uMC5Yw.jpg?1725435193\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032207572/original/2459lp28hsycXQDmuf7rM4kRVksF4X76uA.jpg?1725435427\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033414002/original/GEuQdwJ8lG87ZnjzwYbugQfAxrnfyvTVfA.png?1727156518\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033414043/original/yaVgBWCEiRT_Ake6qcMvfx1YzKZRkq1sAg.png?1727156634\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034103706/original/quRh1jxtDsRwUWY-r5tW43G-DzqHNiWzxQ.png?1728042513\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034103773/original/Ng6ViI_8H4XNuI6BggvRV72XJxPKDNCBFg.png?1728042549\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034103835/original/jLlpe8MQxMPv23khlcCH8pqu6su0pXHfdA.png?1728042568\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034103891/original/p60FKd-0rp7UPH145ubfn9-yoe_2bwRYdw.png?1728042603\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034103990/original/sGWBEwvG8lBythy_eTrm-ZPfwTvUL9mkdg.jpeg?1728042667\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034104204/original/OdoOabg73mZdyxjKfE1Vkpo6mopk_0p6EA.jpeg?1728042836\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034103618/original/CqWtMGheAGEFv4nZTR9YHcHKnCMVtVsYnQ.jpeg?1728042476\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034108731/original/-sXSCSMBTBgBZnWCUxpSLfdLVTswZUk-tg.png?1728045588\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034108773/original/l0Ion--7quZWh3nZ8I9DfCWNRi8pfzntKQ.png?1728045619\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034108788/original/SpHu5N_Z-BymA69QaftnYT24YJuiGGwvMw.png?1728045640\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034108820/original/-GVLMpeYCWrPTD6yUTRd5CEeWZFYB1UE3Q.png?1728045677\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034109121/original/6oxFeaWK7INztLF5qu_X0HWB4nZkt41iIg.jpeg?1728045887\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034108891/original/O64_8g_YlwM4Xt9Fn6LjDcAYUCOKw8t7lQ.png?1728045724\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033414105/original/LWVq6Er5rHqRBNePkyPld-KudW2yjGPVXQ.png?1727156790\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034108647/original/L2lZ0LwXKMvXuI7u5VsLzh5V8mWXvtAldw.png?1728045553\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034101650/original/wKRH_G0nGBm-HhipPli_f5FPbOudnHGCTA.png?1728041285\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000369146/original/Yvs3IeM4Iq-7TwRlttbuEuV97nsWvc3nLw.png?1685740278\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000369159/original/ojy184_ZOKzusnWIbQWdFFtXk_hRazXeXQ.png?1685740294\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000369214/original/EBNo8muVmOtNWuazHcAJf1WPQDTdkHRcIg.png?1685740422\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000369175/original/1b6GfjmDZReDi2d9p1mUG4o9qCE2_qnBGQ.png?1685740361\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000369092/original/Qlyh1rT5wnQWK8sX89ynTVUNDulRAINCYQ.gif?1685740089\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155032210122/original/PdZexKgAxNWLj2gCZYgFBy_SboGv3yTqxQ.png?1725437066\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033414269/original/n7uy7xfXNKR0X1_dJrRw_t9Kt-Cz0acY_w.png?1727156995\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000377895/original/2L9AL61GjrJkury9dFvLnpO1CJIbPjN6xg.png?1685778335\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000377932/original/7Ic6nTQcF_9KMZ-rLjwANe3quP4WQIAIPQ.png?1685778380\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000378079/original/aLNlE61zesfaDmaT33jLXS8pwzSvLnVQ-g.png?1685778956\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033414378/original/9fLZ_ZeEDfoUF1nrVQ-FecwQFMb_n2ciwA.png?1727157209\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034098899/original/pbqV1FA9BLB4z8M_I-Q5cThF9xflxHkPrg.png?1728039559\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034099578/original/eteVbdWVd15KAAyOCl-nZ3YoD0iqX3VQKQ.png?1728040004\")
![\"image\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155025239622/original/LYlTpwIK7iIup7RsfgO98jfuGKk0sg_UHg.jpeg?1714396696\")
![\"image\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155025239625/original/UHz2YRMJU2zD49KyQH9m_RIlWaPPl9DJJA.jpeg?1714396696\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155034098053/original/cw9E_xH8xe2gfZEmgcGd-XUW4umw0WUIdQ.png?1728039034\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000476811/original/sqy4Zcn1OZn1SOQuM0GRCTiWNod519BGag.png?1685985455\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000476601/original/p_AHhYGN_RiNF4plE_2XWrRAzngwLNJxIQ.png?1685985171\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000476827/original/hRXQ08YLQ4QDtVt_p1kuZiEkLBCT3vmS6A.png?1685985494\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000470249/original/PFjVPRROHqqSCbfXHJyjGNbLi3XCjLsGvA.jpeg?1685979954\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000470251/original/0apJv7WZOjrk3NAVI5McMfxmkYntFL_aAQ.jpeg?1685979955\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000727816/original/iTmJm_sJqH4wb6ov_u6MoNrBd-SHJBoy3Q.png?1686240953\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000727694/original/gAhEScNoXwHag3GaIg2mR7ZRhQzhEDWSwg.png?1686240870\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000728099/original/nvlGOu5ClH1cVR8E37bvuTzWyjn1n15EUQ.png?1686241309\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155000477748/original/BNVcis7jL8KxfaGEeX_tUpY_O1JJeYjL9g.jpeg?1685986870\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155050568735/original/UEG4SHSsVaIaYLceHHkN2vgSVwxTgOgNVg.jpeg?1753773086\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155050568590/original/6SSPY5cRxSCPqXA0umv2-kQJI4bKixhI9g.png?1753772973\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/48284822559/original/irKDZVwLE-ObhLu4z1YZborho0yAeNLjAg.jpg?1677769882\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155025358190/original/pqhxcBuEqd8gL16XkEQaWjclUGVjY5M7OA.png?1714564555\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155059931288/original/K1DJ8Cmy-o4FU-0nHWAbIQODu4qJoGyZNg.png?1764874524\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155050787086/original/dShtIRkWL70cFXZp0bgFMUTNEHEetXePaw.png?1754042869\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155001426452/original/lHFh9j87_8vh7FhbI0dH2IHZeA_ysqrpWw.png?1687280858\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155001426451/original/qYfG24IQdY6B5blaXb3Pxo8YJ_CI2IQ91A.png?1687280857\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155001426453/original/9oLKr8pfh8CD4aMtX2bsYQ6RASpFkre1Fw.png?1687280858\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068765279/original/rdWtxjNJ2I44oOi5yuDK1COpXoC0tWg85Q.png?1775724032\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068782892/original/7wDlhcmmtlBOX60j6wWVqvt9FE7m9v4Nvw.png?1775732945\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068783071/original/5VnAh9823NG08ukvpGXYyToT5rtScHRtMQ.gif?1775733041\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068766776/original/rR9-acklfGCzfp-6BQemzHGazUNmx_2ihQ.png?1775724633\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068784776/original/s7iGMy4c9j_G7DwVcM5JffVzvpXzefUDMg.gif?1775733992\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068783510/original/X2PeH5UhGfSAhzdpfu_RD_nrkBEpLNsNVQ.png?1775733257\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068766915/original/Z2v6lT98uylxj42SnvgHn1jebUn14fcDMg.png?1775724726\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068783913/original/JHkCln7HPBDLfdNbyI0b-6v0pwNdW0M18A.gif?1775733516\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068781330/original/s1uU_oC39st0VGv10umS2dat1EGKXyjYWQ.gif?1775732167\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068781664/original/rtSNJDtGawJK3ZtKRx00qppYDdQmn9O3mA.png?1775732379\")
![\"Navigate](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/bprRykWzXSKjURMczcWU+/GIF+Recording+2025-12-31+at+3.48.16+PM.gif\")
![\"Email](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/nHDHMg85jOYSP0K4QDUc+/Screen+Shot+2025-12-31+at+3.49.35+PM.png\")
![\"Date](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155061665817/original/Rzk851hBFRZOzOnatjfGFu63drYiHRCRlw.png?1767176543\")
![\"Select](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155061666100/original/o2zxBJeoftfqcYM1eNwgz6SsMwtkX-eliA.png?1767176684\")
![\"Choose](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155061666434/original/RUKyExutxMBhhxyfWRx1Lc8a7MsueP480w.png?1767176780\")
![\"Metric](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/TsMIT4JD3O0Y3A2wy2wA+/Screen+Shot+2025-12-31+at+3.57.42+PM.png\")
![\"Pagination](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/4qkAMKpXvHhoNlZiKkJG+/Screen+Shot+2025-12-31+at+3.59.04+PM.png\")
![\"Open](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/50TaqXT09ew0YhONKegH+/Screen+Shot+2025-12-31+at+4.03.41+PM.png\")
![\"Agency](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054231515/original/oyQpBxqteobD49EDjMbCRk3O54hLyFyxCQ.png?1758471665\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/EQRjq5kyPOjcxN8DZimX+/GIF+Recording+2026-02-17+at+23.24.24.gif\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/0wpiPNT56ZC4FV1zJIuT+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-17+at+23.25.54.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/iuFVfTT1O1gez2pz7sav+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-17+at+23.31.26.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/BWOrFHtzo8CTPiY1iLVH+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-17+at+23.34.59.png\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155065123518/original/P73qnQ3YlzJ4AGbCBpcU1WKZIYz_DFNbrg.jpg?1771351974\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155065127426/original/8Wvj0wZ_yBjODjzCSgO8GPRUohtS6cDDIA.jpeg?1771358388\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/zE8FtJIojoGKfm6cWQCt+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-17+at+23.45.40.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/kMNSeQLix6yoUpW05SQw+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-17+at+23.51.39.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/aEjlOlaxQ2hfE26SNoag+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-17+at+23.54.19.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/PW1u5KuZJKmKw9BCK9se+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.02.46.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/J4HthSkNdJ4yqIsezUg9+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.10.29.png\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155072235524/original/jiwJp30YW-wtXBKAd0BQ7AhnTu68c4yzxQ.png?1779806022\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155072235575/original/TT7Q8OLEBsjzti2VRHT-hd4QR3nV_AghnQ.png?1779806046\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/9v5CGRWdFtsCdB76tyio+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.15.38.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/vaRjiY8tr3hzLV0sPN82+/Screenshot+2026-02-18+at+00.32.04.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/LZu0NINyU6yviUtxTb7X+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.36.59.png\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155065125867/original/sIG5UPLthwCm7MhybExt7BDOxt94pZmrTw.jpg?1771355336\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/WOZ5o60lkvYjAJfIOu2w+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.44.13.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/7qdTkwLIEh7kFHtdYMr4+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.45.46.png\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155073468751/original/m8KQVIVsKhn62p2CKYvQyKjlEgxK-2--Ow.png?1781183244\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/4DLqibhyLCaNs4x6RDgX+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.53.03.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/FZV1vR7obeVeAVjKnlFf+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+00.56.09.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/FEbdizNi8dOzQkaTRWNi+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+01.01.44.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/8bF4je15qTn8Lb6K9f3o+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+01.03.50.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/xxMXWNdLu7as6aoxcVuK+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+01.06.17.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/R6mQGAP5ozn4B8jpqYHA+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+01.07.20.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/Opa0YlNGULgeeZCTwX4t+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+01.10.08.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/SXC1aDrlwmYwxWSvf465+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-18+at+01.11.48.png\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155065127120/original/z66l-fFBF5YBnZA-L78fUJP7v-f-YUcZ8w.png?1771357757\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155003164570/original/il3Z5AqzqQL73D7WICFYaznY2f3TFD-WUQ.png?1689694676\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155003164296/original/qYWVWaM9pHq3m9xh4yhZ54OMB3FW1P0fVg.png?1689694496\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155003167979/original/dKepIyRSdkN_nrkwK1iK66ycKOlbEaq8TQ.gif?1689696760\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155003168102/original/TcxDovrBn6I5ZxYM9rEvnAC51p49OiFMEw.png?1689696863\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155003168352/original/4Jpor8Jl26KBh9xA7d-k9dp8dyqf2aOggw.png?1689697044\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155003168429/original/el191MGSCaOCMk0wRDkdbJwkFSZBvnHaFw.png?1689697100\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155003168497/original/rQPbqsdio9yN2jhxJa7BsS1iV6qn4gMqkQ.png?1689697179\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068865380/original/u7HJrY8_UYxPrpN_-N-CZ6EXR9JX5fYmkg.png?1775812748\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068865282/original/ljASInZp3deyEAGpGVp0_EFWtFsgoM3OSA.gif?1775812714\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068865454/original/L_ezlkfcX2wALfeAUVL1X51aTYNDZzFIZw.gif?1775812769\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155068866202/original/YIgUvvHzHdMQLT163fhkWnxERT0UDqYMZg.gif?1775813139\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062477341/original/TYf5vN5ZlHb2_pFXXRwHePyy6otOfOQFgw.png?1768233456\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155051048995/original/xJZNtb6wUG2VpEzzvm82Ycy60IybiMmwlQ.png?1754492079\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042945251/original/Z53KsUGmuALooZ4NFi1C9klHnnt8U38SsQ.png?1741600148\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054373293/original/1GqOozmZr8R05rcBS02bYcwmABW5_Kvg-g.png?1758625175\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054373315/original/GbQRrMA_9OgqCGYdKxEYDxnrdnGKI_MFTQ.png?1758625198\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054374744/original/bS4xfntd-FcxoDXa0dTIyuGnQaFO1W7cJg.png?1758625895\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054375370/original/ZNUH2N7b69MRRigSqT6DyeW4Th65JVT_6Q.png?1758626138\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054376449/original/j9cabOyyj4J9ACZ1y84ZRvvPHq5ZpQhTFQ.png?1758626669\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379864/original/AW0ZEWgSObj4Qqb_E_jpxhiK2fEfGyts1Q.png?1758628162\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379921/original/LIt6RXEU7td8gNh9nD3aIBA72x15pLz5pw.png?1758628189\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379944/original/WAQBiC9X50g1rf85uERvXNw4SQKH5ykh0A.png?1758628211\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054382831/original/mzo5MU_Qeyfhb1GhjAbeM-bpV-sZwRQl0w.png?1758629521\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054383098/original/oJQwAGj8bvRdQfQ9kCSxC2ENRgcMt0GgCQ.png?1758629674\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054383273/original/-z9GcnpsgtJtCXrGEjrSEXLq2UuRXytvGQ.png?1758629760\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054379234/original/sU7SMNt7svHQQqdv0ccR0OSsu8UQBpz6Qg.gif?1758627952\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054386664/original/m3QCoTo4lY8TTgO-6-4OyUOjZrGMXdKWKg.png?1758631008\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054386717/original/3iXwCA98Td7yCvpET2QOGedWZuO55nO_ow.png?1758631026\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054389290/original/fwI06PtRXIIDKl8fHgZFCkUuHc5cAalezA.png?1758631844\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054393221/original/hbw0Ucm9KDvZwByBGaa-djBtGnYpkkJUfQ.png?1758633641\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054394452/original/PoC7GGDak7xaSdGLx5TE-tJjSV59aE1SDw.png?1758634022\")
![\"Add](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030769485/original/Q46amTmsqcDKAnWZRyL8QCC1l7hdpWCLCg.jpg?1723215212\")
![\"DNS](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030769518/original/u0y6nwg71SG7K_cEFAXEO8VhBAzeldaGQA.jpg?1723215260\")
![\"Create](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030780106/original/bHbrF0bUz804hradJsT9OgCLJPXR8Qxiag.jpg?1723224477\")
![\"Name](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030780154/original/LirZym0_7wm9fj29hWQHDt2TXRZOmWAQUQ.jpg?1723224534\")
![\"Value](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030780181/original/_hL8idOQ87Q9OiHkGuFyrBAmALbUCfdtAg.jpg?1723224576\")
![\"Clicking](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030780286/original/-_m54mJDcyCoz2qwiphfIQjUELRRPGy2TQ.jpg?1723224707\")
![\"2nd](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030780352/original/y-S6ROHWlFNZIPWbWP35TLikz7DU-x5SBg.jpg?1723224751\")
![\"Subdomain](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/48292768867/original/Oy2wnQ4XgDD5YzExKorYuiEBhl-wH7krkg.png?1681498513\")
![\"Main](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/48292768954/original/rXlYB3cbDo6Ix-Oq_XBgdnsiwBHDHuTUig.png?1681498537\")
![\"2nd](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030780383/original/HdqP4IVZly9D-b8XMoSreStXhxpKOBhmvg.jpg?1723224827\")
![\"Clicking](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030780422/original/rNjjKaWuMefXrQn3wNTgUYDpvKK7OsQibA.jpg?1723224862\")
![\"MX](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030781114/original/Wr1IYksYWNCM4dmafAALzCOKd5u-UHIIRg.jpg?1723225787\")
![\"Name](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030782341/original/EoVTlF-5tjzN0euBbaIAnTPzyOadJO6xnw.jpg?1723228044\")
![\"Priority](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030782362/original/S3zPWDAvVfLvcHd18dzny8F2chlD-k-McA.jpg?1723228108\")
![\"Destination](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030782390/original/dCrujp8-torR3KCkqHj9RCUxV9T4IpP4fw.jpg?1723228150\")
![\"2nd](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030782407/original/STd7r76SSYxjjEueEZ71PlcaGBOkTHo5Jw.jpg?1723228189\")
![\"Name](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030782413/original/HGLSaAWGMgGCvPBFzdZi2p5c6a2196-KMQ.jpg?1723228228\")
![\"Priority](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030783105/original/TBBrnlPpoLpeqs517AvUL65F5TN5oV6qbQ.jpg?1723229730\")
![\"Destination](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030783114/original/gmZ3PYwnHX5SoqOoa1c3TPV-FvlUOwQM6A.jpg?1723229761\")
![\"CNAME](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030783142/original/PpLAFvnX8fpVSkGYfge-jqVsPe-05bhTMA.jpg?1723229788\")
![\"CNAME](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030783146/original/NzlqSBBFNxO15QArOp7-b2YQT2e5HoEqmg.jpg?1723229819\")
![\"CNAME](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030783164/original/pajiIQ0wDsE7fPob2fz6xdduz_LfP-iKMg.jpg?1723229856\")
![\"All](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030783184/original/F1CbuTsrXYX_Jc1kpb5rRqS82VtyueNFiQ.jpg?1723229890\")
![\"Verify](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155030783203/original/X-TDph4fv6CxTwGhAoTVFfFqut48mxYVKQ.jpg?1723229933\")
![\"Risk](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031509099/original/vzPwf3ZKSHgnOLALFrGJ9Brchc7OrY_Vgg.jpg?1724335549\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155039831887/original/HuDe5zEU0tm6DykpMCq7Drkpq0HOBUquYQ.jpeg?1736883910\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155039831924/original/x9zr6WhxO6hBvnunYXFfnmhzvcQ0qg-PLQ.jpeg?1736883970\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155039831968/original/WFLxJRolGt3oDjKbry57BKQ70j7R__2oeQ.jpeg?1736884059\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155039832113/original/_2GdAT-hU_VyiZm1GbybknD992oS05MTlw.png?1736884527\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155039832645/original/Hs_TOjSoBvdOxQMKuz2lUyfgHtYzFf16Hw.png?1736885822\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155006077655/original/txxKpO4AIP8bsJ_xJXsOskAt7ryjm5LQKQ.gif?1692999222\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176260/original/DyIootGhs_Fe0VM2ODyR-LvWk8jgZx6ktQ.png?1692034961\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176564/original/1yhYsF-j8LZBLpCRIiC3DFx8gY6ZUJXcUg.png?1692035255\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176611/original/uD1WdXkMBcdAAioCchZ9KI4iXPrdpzvs_g.png?1692035350\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048869856/original/ptDSqDDA0-lugx9llLeqsJPma_8UINGDRw.png?1750863431\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155064535966/original/1Wy6TXP3j0O6X3fe3gZXfd-e_5_oMXRVhA.png?1770691284\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176906/original/Hc6I1UBbhapeFzgazVj1Cfl0zRTe5p6WFA.png?1692035608\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005176960/original/5IbS881B_zhWOcA6jL9yt2K-K-aHE71Sxw.png?1692035717\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048870075/original/_y71MZip2uZ8eWJwiiyGt4iy3jv8be7M4g.png?1750863597\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048870095/original/6mW5SrJoH7NcON2qG_e4_d7NXVMXkPuPVw.png?1750863612\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005177049/original/4YnRYABTyjSflTUNTFwCTIhQ7l7fOgp7GA.png?1692035835\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005177080/original/Ap_qV0C47UudDnSGpOCti216VeTFlQtsBA.png?1692035892\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005177120/original/-2ntwlxNMYpzQZYt2ekAmKg8YdNiz6tViQ.png?1692035967\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031519619/original/rSGl4f8VmzPchJvRHwBHLJ4YRzlfNOA7Gg.png?1724342208\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005360578/original/Xtw5Tg6Zo6hR5fa-yntVaJ1FHAAHRA8HYQ.png?1692202257\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005360682/original/FrzOcKGOD049_fgkT4YoTtpUiB3Frue8aA.png?1692202339\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005360735/original/YyCVrOjjUXoT3LAXB5HH9FqViPcgwQhA-Q.png?1692202364\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155005359267/original/Js0EKCD3ei5VwLgzDu0v4pwIsf2DU60rKg.png?1692201380\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155047217521/original/M5f1MlvPh9kJ-XkatSS2xyJK1V0PIeoQeA.png?1748259815\")
Year -The user will have to choose the date and time of posting on repeat once in the year.![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155047217609/original/fbm-AVKXu1xuvayEOijjrLYbT75d0_AO-A.png?1748259846\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031519673/original/Um6YmDsHILXzVQ2RgqooRhcZWjOsP3NF2A.png?1724342288\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041720419/original/m6PRzF3NQEdGf2bwDa0gTGcZOx2E7ZohQw.jpeg?1739792393\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041720461/original/tmfJtToO53129fB6M02t87Jr_3ILyrltQg.png?1739792417\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041720473/original/T_nj3fnpSNPbt3ZRN2xo2WAk64F-oTpyFA.png?1739792436\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062695015/original/oX8LId93YSrM_6h6ypg_ETg4eWeCctBMlg.png?1768460530\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155065759707/original/PBNHetgQ1i_K8kTPAQ6RXumtFW0ICqat5Q.png?1772099697\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062695255/original/6UdEe0QrbHEr2aOpUhHDq-BaGS0-BC_2AA.png?1768460744\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041721293/original/i6B2z0QUdLHa5dw3e0vNit3Ny8IeavXOQw.png?1739792952\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062695321/original/WJ4n2v2MIVa3EbDV3y1zwASjldc5TKlbDA.png?1768460799\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062695356/original/QSRtNo9GVMrX3r5t6KkZj-noHgIHJ3Y7uA.png?1768460850\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062695732/original/UBngab81d1sn2Uge0-rSxbkzI-FuyYLBPQ.png?1768461203\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155062695762/original/TDVBnoOy2xQFQ2d9s9LpsZsbJZhnRyGM_g.png?1768461247\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155006871297/original/eFVrDP9dBBfbUJTwKPORfnAQ78x2IX25QQ.png?1693918019\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155006870159/original/BYvzRr3v7bVrXrBLIX_rW7-8BxMsWuq69Q.png?1693917550\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155006870904/original/0HlGdUswVTLiT5Nmgcy8gqfRRlwUWH3lAQ.png?1693917819\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048076510/original/kwx7hpFdLDvnMqAJXVEPjz_kXOzE1IXwsA.png?1749642540\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048076866/original/hWRVXk36tckfj8Yt8jYKKvTj3ly4VMSa-A.png?1749642747\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155047320213/original/BHmkOZ33Xuvei6KFL-TROM2ANyLpukTZ7g.png?1748378760\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048095065/original/YKGJp47d3YgbzwPmdZZH9BqK5jbq49YCQA.png?1749654257\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048095144/original/FIDnHHQkOXcGUkUKlx1qr5DanGqn3drjYA.png?1749654323\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048078800/original/fWdS3ioVT8ZauMSl7AjRRpKr4JpbeeHPkg.png?1749644053\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048078966/original/2gKpHLCrhxoiIwNANwn5e1xx6Tieq_qyvA.png?1749644148\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054023090/original/BiHSxTR3GJ0FibdgEyt3JziIfRDpmUnAJw.png?1758186181\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054024535/original/CrC7ZfU2-KCpi3hNdfuPUmKu_olJGbSDQA.gif?1758186871\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155054024874/original/BY36tW24-b0C0-qORBHswulKJJzXhybQnQ.png?1758187033\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/NGK21FCbtFdfuiqL3xej+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-11+at+5.15.43+PM.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/ZUR1k8q62GCmfoC2wPcp+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-11+at+5.17.23+PM.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/epbl6lAAIipriHIek0tr+/GIF+Recording+2026-02-11+at+5.28.58+PM.gif\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/ui4lB9UzQFKPrGpUoNlB+/Screen+Shot+2026-02-11+at+5.30.23+PM.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/cVt1b50U4HGlQrebLVyB+/GIF+Recording+2026-02-11+at+6.16.42+PM.gif\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/6L2hHAyBpD31Fe1e3s60+/GIF+Recording+2026-02-11+at+5.52.58+PM.gif\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/HEmS8M9kDDzNKrEMijHa+/GIF+Recording+2026-02-11+at+5.55.20+PM.gif\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/Z2Gy2tHBUuHScvZTmHEf+/GIF+Recording+2026-06-30+at+20.08.17.gif\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033464762/original/vrWsCsFVyHEYQnkM-iE_xNV7AQww6-YRmQ.jpg?1727189119\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033464764/original/DNs4-a-1Hy0hX5FpNae81NMXH1lhs5CVIA.jpg?1727189126\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155029579750/original/37SJUHYeE7I3lWekJJDWoDrQS57F0WZ2Og.jpg?1721422191\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033543989/original/-SoNMWo3vN9pnmFfhq3_ASpWlu5N5BPxMQ.jpg?1727275716\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033556024/original/CXDfqU_ggZ4vkjBbRz9XbYXRYhz8MkEJgg.jpg?1727284889\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/XPUG6V1zfMuqEfYVcsP6+/GIF+Recording+2026-06-30+at+20.11.35.gif\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/jGEe3wWsXMtBHC5YIluF+/GIF+Recording+2026-07-01+at+18.49.52.gif\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155033556394/original/FyDs6Ag9IlKbeyzalAns1DK5HeIklgywBg.jpg?1727285369\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/lFRIxtARfa5KlnfclmZH+/GIF+Recording+2026-06-30+at+20.26.01.gif\")
![\"Dedicated](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031452195/original/4WpKfwxRPKGnTZIl2P1zx5XU5J-t6SUJDA.jpg?1724267134\")
![\"Email](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155008545111/original/G6ZM7opEZrQTEQDvqoTbQFYUdwYR_PrNFA.png?1695657495\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155049683643/original/eP2hToI_4TLeO8vY2qpceI0Gn2YqPIwScw.png?1752177408\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155049683666/original/mqdIFP8q7BBzdMNkhD1J1-6OhAkuENLVYQ.png?1752177469\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155049683973/original/dLRWwP6Caa7r6a2N_l09_5BMsc8beEhJ1Q.png?1752178137\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155018335574/original/NQ-ywFOUEi4ny-4WBP0pGjrX1S84B1-fwg.png?1705925986\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009129939/original/ljGpSDLcDdd-9knR7lMWqfVlfuhAjnKjLg.png?1696343867\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009129927/original/E-aWIuKCArOaEVdeLiyQ6BYp4knhkShqBg.png?1696343865\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055530308/original/5VhD97g5_Szhterlz__FtrJ376EpFXCArQ.png?1759931805\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055530397/original/r74SRDYcQY8YaRXdHxj0HqwzqehXk-eIaQ.png?1759931858\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055530476/original/ydivUWdrc8GOie_nxrvH9YjPdWH1mr1-5g.png?1759931909\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009129941/original/TCrkq5xczfBJj_Jd50Tnhre6DNXqHydE1w.png?1696343867\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055530694/original/xy91wt151AQcaqv7nD2aOHnGc_xna0F4oA.png?1759932027\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009129942/original/VcgRrCxOyet5lCDer97vLERGn02fRe6YtA.png?1696343867\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155064040493/original/p6ikyhhQlCffVahc68PS6npSqGCVSqe6LA.png?1770098889\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155064040473/original/Fbn8NP-Dgt3XoubbJCh0AF3F0KU0YWiC7Q.png?1770098865\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031452579/original/nlzjB8P9YXIOJgQGAXp8ZzeXxyDqI1GX8w.jpg?1724268138\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031452608/original/z1j8mntoQrAIeQQqA0PQp1CM1HwZ1vKlLg.jpg?1724268176\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155031452640/original/BvQDYf4cDhJ52G4FTdvZ60VPhNuh8A6phA.jpg?1724268225\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009567725/original/MGcEGrG94lo1h91nalxOHYlcQ2jNRhkEBA.png?1696837840\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009567791/original/JQF8N0VlbKo9vpFxWz3yw8SaFMVyf1TAMg.png?1696837899\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009569127/original/jKoAvC0wqCE_gqBohUVKQvjc0_r6EzdScQ.png?1696838511\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009569325/original/IJPw9dOn_0_MuKiwiLg41ljMp-jn2Hmkvg.png?1696838572\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009569526/original/WqxtX26vNHJvgqaSguv9LvipF9-_4XYUDA.png?1696838646\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009569766/original/eAwHwlrD_8Lobkk3m3hYtO7mBxgEdctZzw.png?1696838748\")
![\"SMTP](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009612052/original/IUIljk9XIJS27U3BT_o4jUzNTpWR7LasGg.png?1696855911\")
![\"Three-dot](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009612160/original/cwkp94jqGl-jc1vsViWXa2bvRMaphEwmkw.png?1696855977\")
![\"Reverse](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009613038/original/Oge0tXLX2gyJh_WWlLh5Xdb0TiEVuC-AJA.png?1696856251\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155063620661/original/Pnq9_0iZAu_ofzFdp_b_kWCF4Zc3d45fbg.png?1769539270\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155070726682/original/Cdt9oK8H2pBQYK0aO0zxsh-7yx8Oprg2sA.png?1778081676\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155070651297/original/6GxITNBD6sE4-D_cKvVHddNBAXMbQWVjkA.jpeg?1778018784\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155070720551/original/UlJUrBo3_Gh2aq1aTOJ52jXJGWjxGbUHtQ.jpeg?1778078771\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155070720584/original/HjIJ64g0EpvRyzisLvaVArlDxyyySZY-8Q.jpeg?1778078784\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155011791244/original/NV5bWkfOBjBijowGjsXV1cJ1x6jxb8mgQQ.png?1698957639\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042034342/original/g5qw4injNkpmSYRFxrfnNtwlm9iHugRvMg.png?1740148687\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042034384/original/2vOEXiiM3_red78xpkaDpM34_hOSqB1HYA.png?1740148710\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042034421/original/RgmJIhW_ih4ZdJ9coSzQA4KPjKhiTu2o3Q.png?1740148745\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010056534/original/aiz-Ofx7jvEArutcHKrHitdG6x-8YDwjbg.png?1697198140\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009970166/original/3qCemDIge-T1k0l2NTdUQaqBAuDM-fwkOA.png?1697122069\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009971637/original/GhdkCyVKk4LiWBOrT5iimckFdLTj1Eb1TQ.png?1697122864\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009970906/original/UsxS3aGtvlwCjHxrP3ShXhaz2nqvNcsd7A.png?1697122455\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010056771/original/KCbFist1lK0cA4DKg6_tlwrMWijYeuGL-g.png?1697198239\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010056868/original/HiF5MUQjo8_Cvw8IvBuiICfWqSHvRajAog.png?1697198304\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010057041/original/tPOVWtT5ig-dG6qGvrO0fjqx4HTCXHiFmA.png?1697198368\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009975828/original/_zNLJXZUseVxZHCZ5CVX6JvfGPFbPS4V0Q.png?1697124190\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009977185/original/urZ5-b3HRWwEOkxLcmjtWvHqA0igt4HA0Q.png?1697124967\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009977428/original/EE4E1t2oyUeZlpmctMlyEQQAZNPlV1YgRw.png?1697125047\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009978053/original/27vKd3PO_-Oi6lD16lzoMLk2xWHy70wSqg.png?1697125244\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009978972/original/3MWNCYx8mLNZCqi92xlhb43KPMS6kAzbXg.png?1697125550\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009985010/original/eWUIR90lbwwsJjclWuCirEcwva2NxcawxQ.png?1697128332\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009985058/original/6eddlGzEbt2-7wJM9mRobbVLsa96_oi48A.png?1697128373\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009985968/original/dcSLSa5AlEy5fh3lLnOJU9TM4FlLA5Zw2A.png?1697128784\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009986380/original/BHEccV8xipyuF-GbKRzjxcvT2QjjBB9QIw.png?1697128932\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009989986/original/_3ABLUhxhsHSRmn_uyvJh3NgctFb4XF_QQ.png?1697131516\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009990802/original/uVeQroA0MV1fGH7NAp6iH5__P7uEehqo-g.png?1697132231\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009990853/original/4nBOm8fAGyQ34wEgXSws_RD6TYHjsIzESw.png?1697132271\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009992667/original/ybHmh8pg5Q_5Tble9_IzDd5idyaHqPzFig.png?1697134292\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009993558/original/c8R63SyPyTXmuKg5_-C5FW2Jh8O_Q5GU4Q.png?1697135590\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009993599/original/IdCkpkdV5fOsCS9SX-bkKuIsigezFG8tcQ.png?1697135673\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009993645/original/MNqV767sNLtdLYKxH3bHERszWOl4Lz1WcA.png?1697135770\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009993689/original/4kNj3tNRcl9hP5jwtqECh2cBCN0LgpkrMA.png?1697135899\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009994016/original/NuNsREtKzjWvqpGbTsTRt6xU7gIZC4hXrQ.png?1697136361\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155009994056/original/1DGpk1rEatstJp4RhI8TWSsI--PmCXzYDQ.png?1697136456\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041886156/original/3l8-lM-iblc4GVHrRi-8IhRW2xCRmZ6Tsg.png?1739972988\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041886204/original/ZHNn6_Z56c2duoC4liKc--nFsOKTlXVijA.png?1739973016\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041885054/original/JkXb463bY70qAH4y6dK73xEgndgb3IcV7Q.png?1739972307\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041885125/original/xTvFuUFCNtTcKTjqrwDvy8iTG58BUcVCsw.png?1739972335\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041885222/original/V2Zd2QpS0cXgoTUimEXHQpGIOxhByiTylQ.gif?1739972402\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041896996/original/kfpdFfMGGODU1vsv4UNRNq_0dj2zr96_oA.png?1739979472\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041897064/original/rBa3NLNS4UtjZo9eHwTsF0inZ7XPsQL3ZA.png?1739979510\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041897180/original/KBylowqsqanJ5tOJ9mrnYTRaETXcTTiN5A.png?1739979601\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041922612/original/nrk8CoJ8Af2WyYh5z1xykSf0RniuSzb3aA.png?1740031934\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041897491/original/PdWOOr3dq4GJ9RgkwKDn29zqmSzWmov0Wg.jpeg?1739979867\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041897285/original/_yXbsBRV0ctdMgFl8AU1Tm9uE1TD-elZVA.png?1739979711\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041898099/original/FjpmKYteP-O6b7CMk55-SvJzrJf5wxJeMA.png?1739980387\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041898572/original/PnYS-U2q4HxeusttUQ0ApMPUg59YrMJAZA.png?1739980664\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155041916436/original/9235Ht5a7ANf1861Qswh9SNGrDX-ZdP5UA.png?1740015762\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042037157/original/Q59lkUxpC2KGbEbRlSXTgCQ0PQPXZ3jwBw.png?1740150648\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010518416/original/qkFg8Hcug6YAH4mmV0H5gBVYDGb48UQG8A.png?1697704090\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010415170/original/Qik7rpWoi8n9fvpnlFjEj5CDfAvXX_hTfw.png?1697624900\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010518546/original/4ry62KeHcXiu5vXe9NT5pJTThrk6Y3F0_Q.png?1697704113\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010519090/original/aVbb3PlFS79ZBM_TCDW4zaHMW4E1KOCO4g.png?1697704277\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010519268/original/d9HUFyhGw5OGjnZXrCyVyVNSYNOtOfqrnQ.png?1697704365\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010519423/original/GiPLiUp3Ox0fo5TG4fKRr_R-grQ6G_JBpA.png?1697704386\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010478521/original/8K_wxqV7dV_pAb9YlxIgrX_m7gKLSyutJQ.png?1697646190\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010478590/original/XrEPNmvH03naclIKC7uT7lg-9Dhm38YkYw.png?1697646232\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010478645/original/7TxP28d_eOeVBsEV0Rcj5bkkebvr7VMkcA.png?1697646277\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010479308/original/AGxyN3VXB_zVDl0-fRmLT-O5ViVDWsj_Bg.png?1697646599\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010479367/original/g4LWyrGNHsNgJOILqfNcHCsart6_OQ2lzg.png?1697646648\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155067905600/original/5SX6g5VUWARAKrUsTCt7z_kboJcKKArO-g.png?1774618114\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155067905396/original/KB9V1p8Pb0tsCeHEh_vrLSydHa3yCdIiuA.png?1774617960\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155069592360/original/pNR5a1IgqInkm4SIUzZBOHDmFN-MPKKsZw.png?1776766423\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/2e6iBbpJftfZSCnNg9RQ+/Screen+Shot+2026-01-22+at+8.16.13+PM.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/D8sJph7yTErAl2H52u5L+/Screen+Shot+2026-01-22+at+8.24.05+PM.png\")
![](\"https://jumpshare.com/share/wpWbLMZHBLBWjDd58VT9+/Screen+Shot+2026-01-22+at+8.25.57+PM.png\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155069594450/original/nz8ryDwMrzj2k7vOB-Cj3BVgc4KLOIJZXw.gif?1776767448\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155067905683/original/fdZfbdSnMZNNQQDX83M1jpJW1MhlSMv8fA.png?1774618153\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010748005/original/59xmsXyWsQCiNS-PNMrzDelIHqxjsusodQ.png?1697980413\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010748115/original/AZcjzk4GV-Ekyod1WEdn54eJNPDbQvxSKg.png?1697980780\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042681833/original/SV87vWzuB6lHJJNk7lvoG_FVEw3mu-B2Gg.png?1741168540\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042681998/original/lPMDzRH37oueS7Drx8yN6zGhFdCFK4vPbw.png?1741168574\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042671926/original/O_nqauhVV0ITGnbTG6LrClmuqtCkhJOZQw.gif?1741163161\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042675564/original/Ey3TZjuulv9ZwjNAphF2c35hEhxHPBsnfA.gif?1741165011\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042675696/original/tBkfRZo2BPoAds3bX0kxb0KkooW3GEHq6Q.png?1741165067\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042676303/original/lfYFu5oHfIEtrtAxMa-8k9yV6c5KJv6fvg.gif?1741165444\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155042676225/original/UvDQjlgBS4kt0CqNS1rkLFxvnFz59UnsvQ.png?1741165400\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048433023/original/26NmzuhCVidYxomtxVu5a9dqF-acxfuLFQ.jpeg?1750200013\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048432795/original/Pn9R4nL4-kvVT1TGzotDwtfUEdTZ9rwqNw.png?1750198861\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048432848/original/rTt6HFHnBTedOSTTflevnbCObn7YY2tyeQ.png?1750199055\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048432915/original/R_BJCnYQbwr4-Hq2LV3cyOvDXMZNGf1vDw.jpeg?1750199459\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048948023/original/g1cI_gxwO-UTGs48jCMs9Aua0Z98vCz3mg.png?1750964543\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048950967/original/HKLv5Inx8Qso3Xpv-_b-YPlI9baqkEJeZQ.jpeg?1750971959\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048951072/original/8_mZ_Od0jdif_TRjkBSKZ8jY_x6Sem_IaA.png?1750972325\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048951128/original/h9AAmHbx2NEFuCgcCVRCk0Ly-AZF03xWIA.png?1750972572\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048948173/original/29JquXnGXLuL3P-Oo70I0sTpGYa7Vpzq0g.png?1750964899\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010753288/original/8Xh_dRYpNjzh88N5Vea_yPWZkkNzL4mTBw.jpeg?1697999882\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010753279/original/IUeqq3ZTXd3BloUdV-3R08IJw-PTkjCDnA.png?1697999882\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155048950595/original/jETQXu1bDrrOHrwmpnpO-_iRp86rHeCsVw.png?1750970941\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010753280/original/YI2TGUEyAZFMBh1Wo2Mnz4tUqJ-7ypt3Hw.jpeg?1697999882\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010753281/original/H5dZRFRzg7vqN8f-KaZPZWCxmkT36Ceswg.jpeg?1697999882\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010753291/original/j_DH_DoJ1KrDm4R95oEWrQfP5TpkIbP-1w.jpeg?1697999882\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010753292/original/EW-iHW5YFDjbpH68-amaOE40-VzBCTLlhg.jpeg?1697999882\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010764886/original/9ayXK3MedkuT1JLB-SkJA1drKLS23k_OiA.png?1698039994\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010764973/original/XYMTEIaE2CoMjoinK8n0zqTgZjMVwGzaOA.png?1698040210\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010785820/original/uCVkxCo-szCIBK7iYGasO_UpIPy1uPrwOw.png?1698052937\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010786045/original/Gys-OwLlTxGNc4YWEu9JZFN1BlFdwO1Y7A.png?1698053005\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010786577/original/X-bSyRKJ8wWXkyK2zGP8yV0gGO9m5LCW9w.jpeg?1698053213\")
![\"brwghjbwhjtghbwrtkghwbthgbhrwktgrwthbgrtwg\"](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010786960/original/7zXxbMG0Ych7IuonVWaThtf4mqJqmMNrCw.png?1698053393\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055503478/original/Za8ux2kj4Ir5J_SM_7YmNuv6z30828A2fA.jpeg?1759918382\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055503551/original/Xt1od3MtSIZhhqJP0hV4kKtjTtpLeI4jGQ.jpeg?1759918402\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055503789/original/xmA291pqzVdAQg74dSgC9HH3litdUtdAYQ.png?1759918521\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055504058/original/ZbWmXmVLNXM9XNrEJt9lpyosZAyOKj6Vqw.jpeg?1759918686\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055503989/original/o4-6O2Ow5nz5RatX4WwZ6ijD765rkgmpew.jpeg?1759918653\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155055504019/original/bFRfxJVNhE6N6D3znTmcIPqm_-pkAPfaAA.jpeg?1759918668\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155061266892/original/psYjpvaRJolA7utmuRXqwxIgL_qkR6pXlg.png?1766521294\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155061266944/original/wAV-TRKTOjHkbGuzr6dz_zYs7qtjq9tS6g.png?1766521390\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155061266927/original/zPEiQEDl_7f9ydWAUcwW8wdENiUjdgHt6w.png?1766521357\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010856797/original/DbXa8-XkdJBupuog3BoIsCS2n4f04Tf4Gg.gif?1698085369\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010856886/original/e_B0ljrsNHsjUqVlMNuDs4m0chvFhuINgA.png?1698085499\")
![](\"https://s3.amazonaws.com/cdn.freshdesk.com/data/helpdesk/attachments/production/155010857113/original/VpUvL6VBA3tYydv8MTqiIwUzG4_e3mL6eQ.png?1698085771\")